CR30-X - Manual - 2007 - 11 - 12 6.0

HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual

Document No: DD+DIS150.06E
DIGITIZERS
Type 5175 / 100/110
1st edition
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
10-2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 19054534

eq_00_about manual_e_template_v04
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS150.06E About this Manual
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 2

10-2007 Type 5175 / 100/110 Agfa Company Confidential
► Purpose of this Document

This document provides information on the structure and contents of the Service
Manual.
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous version 1.1
1.2 10-2007 • Added information about digitizer type 5175/110
• Added laptop version of NX workstation


► Chapter Overview
Chapter
0 Order List
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
2 Functional Description
3 Repair and Service
3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information
3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

3.3 Troubleshooting
3.4 Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
3.5 Replacement of Parts
3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations
3.7 Software Menus and Setting
3.8 Software Releases, Patches
3.9 FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams
5 Spare Parts List
6 Accessories
7 Field Modifications
8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications
9 Maintenance
10 Service Bulletins
11 Installation Planning 1 2 3
12 Glossary


► Explanation of notes
This documentation uses:

Safety relevant notes
Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other
equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer,
patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients
can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the
consequence.
Not-safety relevant notes

Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the
described actions.
IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

having a direct influence on the step or action.
• Highlights unusual points
• Indicates background information
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user
interface.
► Conventions
Actions Way of writing Sample

Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on
explanation
Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the
"Return" key <omni-cd.exe> icon
Required text input via the vips Enter vips and click on
keyboard <Continue>


1 About this Manual
This manual is the Technical Documentation for the digitizers type 5175,
subtypes 100 and 110.
Name of the digitizer:

• Subtype 100: CR 30-X
• Subtype 110: neutral (no name)
To keep it simple this manual talks about "the digitizer" only. The digitizer CR 30-X is
always included, if not otherwise stated.
The digitizer is part of the digitizer system, consisting of .......
• Digitizer
• NX Workstation (Tower or laptop version)
• Cassette with Image Plate (IP)
Optional Components (not displayed)

• Printer (Drystar 5302)
• Additional Cassettes
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
NX Workstation NX Workstation
Digitizer Tower Version Digitizer Laptop Version
Cassette Cassette
517511ea.cdr
Figure 1


NOTE:
This manual treats the digitizer with cassettes and image plates.
For more information to the other components refer to .....
Component Information Location
NX Workstation MEDNET, GSO Library
Printer MEDNET, GSO Library


Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Agfa Company Confidential

HEALTHCARE Generic Safety Directions
Imaging Services
Safety Directions
for HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this document

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant
information for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each
Service Documentation as well as Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via

MEDNET => GSO Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.1
1.2 04-2007 • Editorial rework to improve comprehensibility
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
n.a. n.a.
Document Node ID: 11849633
04-2007 printed in Germany Enclosure_e_template_v02
Generic Safety Directions
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Read this document prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
Strictly observe all safety directions within this document and on the product.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 3

04-2007 Document number: DD+DIS238.06E Agfa Company Confidential
List of Contents
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER .........................................................................................................6
2 USED ICONS.........................................................................................................7
3 LABELS..................................................................................................................8
3.1 CE Mark ...................................................................................................8

3.2 System Labels..........................................................................................8
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation.............................................9
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS ...................................................................................10
5 REFERENCES.....................................................................................................10
6 INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11
7 INTENDED USER................................................................................................11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11
9 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12
10 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13
11 COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................14
12 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16
13 RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17
14 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17
15 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ........................17
16 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................23


List of Contents
21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24
23 WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24
24 RECYCLING........................................................................................................ 25
25 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI)................................... 25


Disclaimer
1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.


Used Icons
2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action
Highlights unusual points
Indicates background information
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!


Labels
3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr


Labels
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries. Each laser
source is classified from class 1 to class 4.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye.

Class 2: Laser units having a maximum output of 1 mW. The accessible laser
radiation only lies within the visible range of the spectrum (400 nm to
700 nm). With brief exposure times (up to 0.25 s) there is no danger
due to the blink reflex.
Class 3A: Laser units having a maximum output of 5 mW. The accessible laser
radiation becomes dangerous for the eye, if the cross section of
radiation is reduced by optical instruments. If this is not the case, the
emitted laser radiation in the visible region of the spectrum, with short
exposure times (up to 0.25 s), is not dangerous in the spectral
regions, even for long irradiation times.
Proper use must be observed.
Required safety equipment must be used.
Class 3B: Laser units having a maximum output of 500 mW. Dangerous to the
human eye and in particular cases to the skin.
Class 4: Laser units having a higher output than 500 mW. Extremely
dangerous to the human eye and dangerous to the human skin.
Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V. GIUM

Septestraat 27-2640 -Mortsel-BEL
1011 Date: 20 06-07
Type 5175/100 S/N
50-60Hz
100-12 0/220-240V 2.0/1.0A
Made in Germany
Pe issenberg
July 2 006
Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification


Product Complaints - References
4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident Agfa
HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written correspondence to
the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa
Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 7094
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf


Intended Use - Intended Users - Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
before attempting to work with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure
that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of
law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.


Connections to other Equipment
9 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other
equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been
performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1
harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.


Accessories and Spare Parts
10 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com


Compliance
11 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Full quality assurance system ISO

13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.
Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic
safety and essential performance
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
IEC 60601-1-2 It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential in
determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the electromagnetic
environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit
the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and provide its
ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.


Compliance
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
• This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org
Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.


Safety Directions for Operation
12 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare service
organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this Technical
Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic t information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, Additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen
which may cause an explosion.
Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.


Radiation Protection - Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection -
General Safety Directions for Service Activities
13 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the
jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those
authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be
made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
• Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
14 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.
15 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 12) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232 ,RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).


General Safety Directions for Service Activities -
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect
or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a PCB
without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering (electrostatic
charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a
grounded conducting metal piece.
16 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection

device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.


• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:


Safety Directions for Installation Activities
17 Safety Directions for Installation Activities

• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare
trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains ...
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.


Safety Directions for Installation Activities -
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
Ground potential differences :

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source
as the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a
HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
18 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.


Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the
manufacturer.
Checking ground connections:

WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the device metal housing may lead to electric
shocks.
• In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective earth

resistance according to the national regulations.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present


Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities -
Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
19 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.
20 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.


Safety Directions concerning Modifications -
Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials - Waste Disposal
21 Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be
implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
22 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
23 Waste Disposal
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which
entered into force as European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a major
change in the treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life.
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in
addition, to promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as
to reduce the disposal of waste.
The WEEE logo on the product or on its box indicates that this product must not be
disposed of or dumped with household waste. The owner of the equipment is liable to
dispose of all electronic or electrical waste equipment by delivering to the specified
collection point for recycling of such hazardous waste, collection and proper recovery of
electronic and electrical waste equipment at the time of disposal will allow the producer to
help conserve natural resources.
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of human
health and the environment. For more information about electronic and electrical waste
equipment disposal, recovery and collection points, please contact your local, waste
disposal service or producer / distributor of this equipment.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators please

dispose of these separately according to local regulations.


Recycling - Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
24 Recycling
Recycling pass see http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
25 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.


Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
printed in Germany
Order List for Documentation
Order List for documentation DIGITIZERS

Type 5175 / 100/110
NOTE:
Daily updated order lists are available in MedNet.
Order number for a complete Service Manual:
Order number Edition
DD+DIS150.06E Complete Service Manual 1
Order numbers for separately available chapters of the Service Manual:
Order number Contents Revision Approval Date

of document
DD+DIS325.06M Chapter 05: 2 2007-10-17

Spare Parts List
DD+DIS317.07E Installation Procedure: 2 2007-10-16
Chapters 1 and 11 combined to one device
enclosure document.
DD+DIS172.06E Chapter 11: 2 2007-10-27
Installation Planning
DD+DIS171.06E Chapter 09: 0 2006-10-31
Maintenance Instructions
Access to MedNet GSO Library:
• *IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/mednetcso-library
• *ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
* to request an account to the MedNet GSO Library go to:
http://intra.agfanet/bu/mi/mednethelp.nsf/EN/gettingaccess.htm
Inquiries:
• Phone + 49 89 6207 3949 Fax +49 89 6207 7274

2007-11-12 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 12543956

eq_00_orderlist_e_template_v04
Checklist for Completeness
Checklist for Completeness DIGITIZERS

Type 5175 / 100/110
NOTE:
Verify latest level and completeness of your Service Manual by means of this checklist
for completeness.
Only the document numbers listed here are valid. Discard documents with different
numbers if necessary.
Contents of Service Manual Edition 1:

Chapter Order number / Designation Revision Approval date Pages
of document
0 Order list -- 2007-11-12 0/1
Checklist for completeness 0/2-0/3
List of Service Bulletins 0/4
0 About this manual 2 2007-10-16 1-7
0 Generic Safety Directions 2 2007-06-27 1 - 25
1 DD+DIS150.06E 3 2007-10-16 1/I, 1/1-21
2 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 2/I, 2/1-13
3.1 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 3.1/I, 3.1/1-8
3.2 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 3.2/I, 3.2/1-23
3.3 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 3.3/I, 3.3/1-3
3.4 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 3.4/I, 3.4/1-3
3.5 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 3.5/I-II, 3.5/1-82
3.6 DD+DIS150.06E 2 2007-10-24 3.6/1-25
3.7 Intentionally left blank -- -- --
3.8 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 3.8/I, 3.8/1
3.9 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 3.9/I, 3.9/1-4
4 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 4/I-II, 4/1-5
9 pages General Schematics
5 DD+DIS325.06M 1 2007-10-15 05/1 - 05/22
6 Intentionally left blank 0 -- --
9 DD+DIS171.06E 0 2006-10-31 Cover sheet, 9/I, 9/1-13.
Checklist page I-IV

Chapter 0 / 2 DIGITIZERS 2007-11-12

Agfa Company Confidential Type 5175 / 100/110
Checklist for Completeness
10 SB1: DD+DIS365.06E 0 2006-11-16 1-4

SB2: DD+DIS381.06E 0 2006-11-30 1-4
SB3: DD+DIS412.06E 0 2006-12-20 1-2
SB5: DD+DIS001.07E 0 2007-01-23 1-3
SB7: DD+DIS398.06E 1 2007-02-19 1-4
SB8: DD+DIS397.06E 0 2007-02-26 1-3
SB11: DD+DIS101.07E 0 2007-04-17 1-5
SB12: DD+DIS148.07E 0 2007-05-31 1-18
SIB13: DD+DIS158.07E 0 2007-05-31 1-5
SIB14: DD+DIS172.07E 0 2007-06-29 1-5
SB15: DD+DIS241.07E 0 2007-07-27 1-4
SB18: DD+DIS304.07E 0 2007-08-24 1-5
SB19: DD+DIS301.07E 0 2007-09-06 1-5
SB20: DD+DIS329.07E 0 2007-11-09 1-8
SB21: DD+DIS338.07E 0 2007-10-31 1-4
11 DD+DIS172.06E 0 2007-10-17 Cover sheet, 11/1-25
Site Readiness Checklist (1 p.)
Generic Safety Directions 2 2007-06-27 1 - 25
12 DD+DIS150.06E 0 2006-10-05 12/I-12/1-5

2007-11-12 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 3

Type 5175 / 100/110 Agfa Company Confidential
List of Service Bulletins
List of Service Bulletins DIGITIZERS

Type 5175 / 100/110
• The following SB's are no longer valid (integrated in the chapters of the Service Manual, or
technically obsolete):
SB Order number Contents
04 DD+DIS413.07E Sporadic Error Message 3194 or 3099:

Reset Control PC
06 DD+DIS027.07E Interfering Noise in the Image:
Install Software Patch CRE_1206D
09 DD+DIS085.07E Check Drawer Unit Position before first Switch-on of
the Digitizer
10 DD+DIS097.07E IP Feeding Optimization Kit CM+9517591000 available
to avoid sporadic IP Jams and Shift in Images due to
electrostatic Discharge in Cassette Unit
16 DD+DIS258.07E Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) Application released for
already installed CR 30-X Systems
17 DD+DIS271.07E Sporadic Errors 10754, 10761, or 10767 with SW
CRE_1309: Install SW Patch CRE_1309A
• The following SB's are still valid

SB Order number Contents
01 DD+DIS365.06E CR 30-X System released for Sales

02 DD+DIS381.06E CR30-X Software CRE_1206 with Patch CRE_1206A
released
03 DD+DIS412.06E Sporadic Digitizer Hang-up without Error Message
after Scanning: Reset Digitizer.
05 DD+DIS001.07E Displayed LgM-Values too high: Install Software Patch
CRE_1206C
07 DD+DIS398.06E Light Collector Mantle gets trapped in Post Scan
Rollers of Scan Unit: Mount modified Light Collector
Mantle
08 DD+DIS397.06E Short dark Stripes in the Image in fast Scan Direction:
Install Postscan ESD Brush Kit
11 DD+DIS101.07E Defective PMI board due to wrong inserted
FireWire Interface Cable
12 DD+DIS148.07E Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0 available to solve
various Problems
13 DD+DIS158.07E Software CRE_1309 available on MEDNET
14 DD+DIS172.07E Creating Test Scans with unexposed IPs

Chapter 0 / 4 DIGITIZERS 2007-11-12

List of Service Bulletins
15 DD+DIS241.07E Replacement of Slow Scan Board or IP Handling

Board requires Reset of NX Processing Station
18 DD+DIS304.07E Sporadic Errors 10754, 10761, or 10767 with SW
CRE_1309: Install Patch CRE_1309A
19 DD+DIS301.07E Communication Problems between CR 30-X and NX
Processing Station: Replace FWI Cables
20 DD+DIS329.07E Software CRE_1405 released to support FLFS
Cassette and “White Label Digitizer”
21 DD+DIS338.07E DELL Latitude D830 available as component for
CR 30-X systems

2007-11-12 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 5

Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE Controls, Connections,
Imaging Services
and Setup Procedures
DIGITIZERS
Type 5175 / 100/110

This document contains:
• all important routines to be carried out prior to putting the machine in operation
• location and function of the controls and connectors of the machine
• all routines necessary to put an unpacked machine in operation

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.2:
1.3 10-2007 • added digitizer type 5175/110 (change in page footer only)
• added cable connection details for the NX workstation
laptop version. See section 1.7.2.
• added flatfield evaluation remarks for FLFS cassette.
See section 3.2.3
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v04
DD+DIS150.06E Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INSTALLATION PREREQUISITES ..........................................................................................4

1.1 Check of Installation Site Prerequisites ....................................................................................4
1.2 Digitizer Unpacking ...................................................................................................................4
1.3 Checking the Shipment Completeness.....................................................................................7
1.4 Lifting the Digitizer on the provided Table ................................................................................7
1.5 Mounting the Distance Holder with FireWire Cable Strain Relief .............................................8
1.6 Installing the optional UPS........................................................................................................9
1.7 Connecting the Cables............................................................................................................10
1.7.1 Connecting the Cables at the NX Workstation Tower Version ...............................................10
1.7.2 Connecting the Cables at the NX Workstation Laptop Version ..............................................11
2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................12
2.1 Switch-on of Digitizer ..............................................................................................................12
2.2 Workstation Setup...................................................................................................................15
2.3 Filling in of Site specific Data ..................................................................................................16
2.4 Checking Software Version.....................................................................................................17
3 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION .......................................................................................18

3.1 Cleaning Image Plates before first Use ..................................................................................18
3.2 Technical Image Quality Check of the System .......................................................................20
3.2.1 Creating the Flatfield Test Image............................................................................................20
3.2.2 Importing the Limit Pattern......................................................................................................21
3.2.3 Checking the Images at the Lightbox .....................................................................................21
3.3 Checking the UPS (Option).....................................................................................................24
3.4 Saving the Hand-Over Test (HOT) File ..................................................................................24
3.5 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist ..............................................24
3.6 Filling in "Site and System Data" and "Installation Report" Forms .........................................24
4 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST .................................................................................................25


NOTE:
The Installation Checklist in section 4 of this chapter gives an overview of all steps and
guides through the complete installation process.
1 Installation Prerequisites
The purpose of this section is to show the required tasks before installation to
guarantee a smooth digitizer installation.
The following table lists these tasks:
Task Details see…

Check installation site prerequisites 1.1
Unpack digitizer (if not yet done)* 1.2
Check shipment completeness 1.3
Put digitizer on provided table* 1.4
Mount distance holder 1.5
Install UPS (Option) 1.6
Connect the cables 1.7
*These steps should be performed by the forwarder.
1.1 Check of Installation Site Prerequisites
(1) Confirm that all prerequisites described in the "Installation readiness checklist" are
fulfilled.
This checklist is available at the end of Chapter 11, Installation Planning.
1.2 Digitizer Unpacking
(1) Compare the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the shipping
papers.
(2) Check the packing material for visible transport damage such as
- dented edges
- damage on the box
- torn fixing elements (metal straps).


(3) Check the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes.
517501aa.cdr
Figure 1
IMPORTANT:
If the machine was tilted, the circle in the arrow head of the TILTWATCH changes from
white to red.
If the machine was subjected to shocks, the square field in the middle of the
SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.
If damage is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA representative.
(4) Unpack the digitizer.

The unpacking instructions are printed on the digitizer box.
Figure 2 next page shows the unpacking instructions.


4
3
5
5
C
100 kg
2
3x
B
Note
ABC-Code
Device
Type
SN
E
1
7
A
Hand protection
*118TO41*
No. only needed for production purpose
6
DD+DIS136.06E
1 piece 18TO4 MA 1
Foot protection
F7.5175.0048.0
Figure 2


1.3 Checking the Shipment Completeness
1. Compare the scope of delivery with the packing list.

2. In case it is not complete inform the national service manager. He will decide how
to proceed.
1.4 Lifting the Digitizer on the provided Table
WARNING:
The digitizer is heavy (98 kg; 216.1 lb). Risk of injuries when lifting the digitizer.
• At least three people have to lift the digitizer from one position to the other.
• Use proper shoe and hand protection when lifting the digitizer.
WARNING:
Excessive vibrations during scanning may decrease image quality.
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the
size and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock and
vibrations from other sources.
For more information refer to the Installation Planning document DD+DIS172.06E.
(1) Lift the digitizer from the pallet on the provided table
(2) If the optional Agfa table with wheels is used: Lock the wheels
NOTE:
The transportation lock (= cable tie to fix
photomultiplier with light collector at PMI
carrier) does not have to be removed. Transportation Lock
517511ah.cdr
Figure 3


1.5 Mounting the Distance Holder with FireWire Cable Strain Relief
REQUIRED PART: Distance Holder with 2 screws M4 x 8 for

mounting distance holder
(part of delivery as of SN 1816 and FWI cable Strain Relief
additionally 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726,
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779,
1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814.)
Figure 4
(1) Remove two screws in the rear
Figure 5
(2) Mount distance holder
Figure 6
Result: The distance holder with FWI cable strain relief is mounted.


1.6 Installing the optional UPS
NOTE:
The following steps are only required in case an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is
part of delivery.
(1) Check whether the correct UPS is shipped for the site:
Rated voltage [~V] UPS Powerware 5115 - • 120 = Default

500 (ABC Code: EGPSE)
• 110 = user adjustable via rear
panel DIP switches
Rated voltage [~V] UPS Powerware 5115 - • 230 = Default
500i (ABC Code: EGPTG):
• 220 or 240 = user adjustable
via rear panel DIP switches
(2) Unpack the UPS

(3) Make the cabling as shown in Figure 7 and Figure 8 respectively.
230 V (220 - 240 V) Version

Type 5115 - 500i
USB
517511aj.cdr
to wall outlet
517501af.cdr
Figure 7


120 V (110 - 120 V) Version

Type 5115 - 500
USB
to wall outlet
517501ae.cdr
Figure 8
(4) Adapt dip switches to available output voltage. Refer to the UPS user's guide
which is part of delivery.
(5) On the processing station install LAN safe SW and USB drivers according to the
instructions provided with the Powerware software suite CD.
1.7 Connecting the Cables

Connecting the cables depends on the type of NX workstation:
• Tower version see section 1.7.1
• Laptop version see section 1.7.2
1.7.1 Connecting the Cables at the NX Workstation Tower Version

(1) Connect the FireWire Interface cable between NX workstation and digitizer
(2) If not yet done during UPS installation: Connect the power cable for the digitizer:
Connect it at the same power socket like the NX workstation (e.g. by using a
multiple socket).
(3) Fasten the FireWire cable in the cable holder right
cable holder left
digitizer rear at the cable holder left or
right
Figure 9


1.7.2 Connecting the Cables at the NX Workstation Laptop Version

(1) Mount the 6 pin to 4 pin FWI converter at the laptop
(2) Connect the FireWire Interface cable between NX workstation and digitizer
(3) Connect the power cables for digitizer and NX workstation: Connect them at the
same power socket e.g. by using a multiple socket.
FireWire Cable Length = 4.5 m [15 ft]
Digitizer NX Workstation
Laptop Version
6 pin to 4 pin
converter
517511ak.cdr
Figure 10
(4) Fasten the FireWire cable in the cable holder right

cable holder left
digitizer rear at the cable holder left or
right
Figure 11
WARNING:
Using a FWI cable > 4.5 m (15 ft) may lead to unstable or no communication
between digitizer and NX workstation: Retakes possible.
To connect digitizer and NX processing station, only use a standard 6-pin FWI cable
with a max. length of 4,5 m or 15 ft respectively.


WARNING:
Using different power circles may lead to ground potential differences: In this
case the leakage current via FireWire cable may exceed the limits as defined
by IEC 60601:
Confirm that both, NX workstation and digitizer are connected to the same ground,
e.g. via multiple socket or UPS.
IMPORTANT:
Do not place the laptop on top of the CR 30-X, because the accumulated heat
developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the operation of the system.
2 Installation
The purpose of this section is to show the required installation tasks.

The following table lists these tasks:
Task Details see…

Switch on the digitizer 2.1
Set-up the workstation 2.2
Fill in site specific data 2.3
Check software version 2.4
2.1 Switch-on of Digitizer
(1) Switch on the digitizer

(2) Switch on the processing station: See
IMPORTANT note next page.
517501ab.cdr
Figure 12


IMPORTANT:
As the serial number of the digitizer is not yet known, approx. 30 secs. after first
switch on error 4637 (Registration of Serial Number failed) and possibly error 2712
(ASAP Software versions loaded onto machine and installed on PC are not identical)
will be displayed in the DIGITIZER error viewer on the processing station.
The digitizer will stop boot-up: The status LED will stay red blinking.
Proceeding:
(1) Ignore the error and close the error viewer:
• Error 4637 will be solved with step 2.3, Filling in of Site specific Data, where
the registration of the digitizer serial number on the processing station will be
made.
• Error 2712 (if available) will be solved with a check of the installed software
version, see step 2.4 Checking Software Version.
(2) Continue with installation as described in next section
1st Error after switch on

x
Error 4637 occured. Please call Service to fix

the problem.
2nd Error after switch on.

Only displayed if software on PC and digitizer do not match.
The Software Version loaded onto the digitizer

and that one installed on PC do not match.
Please perform the upload via Service Client.
(Error 2712)
517511aj.cdr
Figure 13


NOTE:
After switch on a selftest is executed.
If the processing station is operational it
takes approx. 1 minute until the status
indicator at the front panel changes from
red to green.
See Table 1 for meaning of the status
indicator colors.
The status indicator stays red blinking
after first switch on, as long as the
registration of the digitizer serial number
on the processing station is not yet done
(See 2.3, Filling in of Site specific Data.)
Figure 14
Status Indicator Digitizer Status Allowed user action
Blue - Constant Erasure cycle active Wait
Green - Constant Ready Insert next cassette for

scanning
Green - Flashing Scan cycle active Wait
Red - Constant Service mode Check processing station for

further instructions
Red - Flashing • Boot-Up
• No connection to
processing station
• Error
Table 1: Description of Status Indicator


2.2 Workstation Setup
NOTE
The NX workstation comes with a default “DIGITIZER System Configuration and
Exam-Tree XML File” installed and activated.
The steps outlined here are only to confirm that the NX was prepared by production
for the DIGITIZER system.
(1) Switch on the NX processing station

(2) Log in as "crservice"
(3) In the main menu select "Service and Configuration Tools"
(4) Select “Load active configuration”
(5) Check menu “Device Configuration – Digitizer”:
The CR 30-X must be available.
See also important note below.
(6) Continue with setup of the processing station as described in the appendix,
DD+DIS326.06E: Guideline for Set-Up and Customer Training
IMPORTANT:
The default “DIGITIZER system configuration file” has following settings:
• Device Configuration:
o Digitizer CR 30-X incl. Digitizer Emergency button configured
o Printer Drystar 5302 configured
o Sheet and image text box configured (and alternatively one factory
default textbox)
• Configuration of Examination:
o Examtree English + adapted “Add image” pane
o System diagnosis examination configured
(visible in Add image pane)
o Dedicated examination for the digitizer emergency button, so that the
examtree can be deleted without loosing the configuration of the digitizer
emergency button
o User interface pre-configured. Note: With import of an other examtree
the "add image pane" has to be adapted
The digitizer gets a default “DIGITIZER Configuration and Exam-Tree XML File”
loaded in production.
A copy of this file is also available on MEDNET, GSO Library → Computed
Radiography → CR Digitizers → CR 30-X → Freeware


2.3 Filling in of Site specific Data
Figure 15
(1) On the processing station select "Start - Programs -

Agfa CR 30-X - Service Client"
(2) Enter user name and password
(3) Select "Configuration - Site Specific Data"
(4) Enter the site specific data
(5) Confirm that serial number indicated on the type label is identical to serial
number entry "Stored in EMS".
(6) Press the buttons as indicated in Figure 15
(7) Reboot the digitizer.
NOTE:
The type label which shows the serial number of
the digitizer is located in the rear.
517501aj.cdr
Location of type label

Figure 16


2.4 Checking Software Version
NOTE
The digitizer only boots-up completely if the software version on the digitizer and the
software version on the control PC (for download to the digitizer) match. As digitizer and
processing station are not staged together, it is possible, that the digitizer or the
processing station has a newer digitizer software version installed.
(1) In the CR 30-X service client select “Modification – SW Upload”

(2) Select “Get installed version”
Node Installed Version Version on PC Status

PMI Board CRE_1206 CRE_1305 different
HDL Board CRE_1206 CRE_1305 different
CRE_1206 CRE_1305 different
SSC Board
Select All
Clear Selection
Get installed version Upload selected nodes
517501da.cdr
Digitizer
NX Workstation
Figure 17
Result:
• If “Installed version” < “Version on PC” (like in the example of Figure 17):
⇒ Perform SW upload to the digitizer (Select nodes – Upload selected nodes).
• If “Installed version” > “Version on PC”:

⇒ Perform digitizer software installation on the NX processing station.
The software is available on the digitizer CD ROM which is part of delivery.
• If “Installed version” = “Version on PC”:

⇒ Okay. No further action required. Exception: If newer digitizer software is
available on MEDNET in the freeware area perform digitizer software update or
upgrade.


3 Completion of Installation
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required to prepare the
digitizer for hand-over to the clinical application specialist.
The following table lists these tasks.
Task Details see…

Clean image plates 3.1
Check technical image quality of the digitizer 3.2
Check the optional UPS 3.3
Save hand-over test file 3.4
Hand-over the system to the Clinical Application Specialist 3.5
Fill in "Site and System Data" and "Installation Report" form 3.6
3.1 Cleaning Image Plates before first Use
IMPORTANT:
• Image plate and tray always belong together. Do not take an image plate of one
tray and put it in another tray.
• Use only AGFA CR Phosphor Plate Cleaner and a soft lint-free cellulose cloth
to clean the image plate.
• Use only a dry cloth or blow away possible dust with compressed air to clean
the tray.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Lint free cloth
• CR screen cleaner
(1) Insert an edgeless means, e.g. a pen

into the cassette lock.
517509ag.cdr
Figure 18


(2) Open the shutter.

(3) Turn the cassette around, so that the 1
black tube side is above.
2
(4) Let the black tray and image plate
slide out carefully onto the table
1
517509ad.cdr
Figure 19
(5) Put the black tray with the image

plate onto the cassette
(6) The tray has 2 little hooks. Put the
tray onto the cassette in such a way
that the hooks reach over the border
of the cassette. This to avoid a 517509ae.cdr
bending of the tray.
(7) Check the image plate for scratches
(8) Clean the image plate and the tray as
follows: Figure 20
• Moisten the cloth with cleaner and wipe the image plate surface softly and
evenly (phosphorous side and rear side).
• Leave the image plate surface to dry for about 10 minutes to allow the
solvents to evaporate.
• Use only a dry cloth or blow away possible dust with canned air to clean the
tray thoroughly. DO NOT USE A SCREEN CLEANER TO CLEAN THE
TRAY.
• Once the image plate surface is dry (after about 10 minutes), check once
again for particles of material and other impurities
(9) Put the tray with the image plate back

into the cassette.
(10) Verify that the white phosphor side is
oriented to the black tube side of the 1 White phosphor side
cassette and that the shutter does not
scratch the image plate. 2
(11) Insert an edgeless means, e.g. a pen Black tube side of the cassette
into the cassette lock while closing 517509af.cdr
the shutter Figure 21


3.2 Technical Image Quality Check of the System

During the “Technical Image Quality Check” of the system a flatfield image is exposed
and compared at the lightbox with a test pattern “lowest acceptable quality”. This
procedure is divided in 3 steps:
# Step Details see…

1 Expose a flatfield, scan and print or archive the image 3.2.1
2 At the NX workstation import and print or archive the limit 3.2.2
pattern
3 Compare the scanned flatfield with the imported limit pattern 3.2.3
“lowest acceptable quality”.
3.2.1 Creating the Flatfield Test Image

(1) Select the largest available cassette. If possible, use a 35x43 cm Genrad
cassette.
If in size 35x43 cm only FLFS cassettes are available, use a FLFS cassette.
Distinction between Genrad and FLFS cassette see Figure 25 on page 23.
(2) Expose this cassette with 20 µGy:
o Take two exposures of 10 µGy (12.0 mAs - 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with 1.5
mm Cu filter) turned by 180°.
o For exposure place the cassette in length direction to the X-ray tube, see
Figure 22.
NOTE:
The parameters "12.0 mAs - 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with 1.5 mm Cu filter" are
approximate values that may vary within the X-ray devices to reach the specified dose of
10µGy.
In addition it is not essential to expose exactly with the dose of 2 x 10 µG. The allowed
range is between 8 and 50 µG.
Rotating X-Ray tube

Anode
Cathode
517509aa.cdr
Figure 22


(3) Insert the cassette in the digitizer

(4) Select exam type "System Diagnosis - Flatfield"
IMPORTANT:
By selection of examination type "System Diagnosis - Flatfield", the correct settings
for image processing of the flatfield are used. Any other examination type may give a
result which cannot be compared with the limit pattern.
(5) Select button "ID" at the processing station: Scanning starts.

(6) Print the image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available)
3.2.2 Importing the Limit Pattern

(1) Insert the software CD ROM of the digitizer into the CD ROM Drive
(2) On the NX workstation select the Main Menu
(3) Select “import images”
(4) Browse to the CD ROM drive
(5) Select folder “SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS-Flat Field-……..”
(6) Select OK
(7) Wait till the image is imported (approx. 30 secs.)
(8) Select the Examination menu
3.2.3 Checking the Images at the Lightbox
(1) At the lightbox or the viewing station visually compare the scanned flatfield with
the limit pattern. The limit pattern represents the lowest acceptable image quality
in slow scan and fast scan direction.: Compare the stripes in “slow scan” and in
“fast scan” direction”.
See also important note on page 23 if a FLFS cassette is used for flatfield
evaluation.


Figure 23
Evaluation:
• If the scanned image visually looks as good or better than the limit pattern,
the image quality is okay.
• If there are unacceptable effects in slow scan or fast scan direction see
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always the long side of the image plate.
43 cm 24 cm
18 cm
Slow scan
direction 35 cm
30 cm
30 cm 24 cm
15 cm 517509ab.cdr
Figure 24: Slow scan direction


IMPORTANT:
If you use a FLFS cassette for flatfield exposure, the image will be slightly darker in
the upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed (approx.
1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image quality evaluation in
slow scan and fast scan direction. See next page.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Genrad Cassette FLFS Cassette
Backscatter
FLFS
Protection
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 25


3.3 Checking the UPS (Option)
NOTE:
This step only has to be performed in case an optional UPS is installed.
(1) Remove the UPS power cord from the wall outlet
(2) Check the message at the workstation: It must indicate a power failure.
(3) Check the digitizer LED: It must stay green
(4) Re-insert the UPS power cord.
3.4 Saving the Hand-Over Test (HOT) File
The HOT (Hand-over-test) file is a logfile, which is created new

(i. e. is overwritten) with every scan cycle.
It shows the most important steps of the last scan cycle.
Saving the HOT file documents the successful completion of the technical installation
of the digitizer as well as the successful connection to the
processing station.
(1) Go to "Start - Programs - Agfa CR 30-X - Service Client".

(2) Select "Reporting - HOT Report".
(3) Select "Save HOT report as".
(4) Save HOT file in directory "C:/Documents and Settings/ All Users /Application
Data/CR 30-X/log/" as "HOT_ddmmyyyy.txt".
3.5 Hand-over of the System to the Clinical Application Specialist

(1) Inform the clinical application specialist about completion of technical installation.
(2) Inform him about any irregularities during the installation
3.6 Filling in "Site and System Data" and "Installation Report" Forms
(1) Fill in the Site and System Data form (part of delivery)
(2) Fill in "Installation Report"
(3) Send both forms to the indicated recipients


4 Installation Checklist
# Step refer to .... Okay

Installation Prerequisites:
1. Check installation site prerequisites 1.1
2. Unpack digitizer 1.2
3. Check shipment completeness 1.3
4. Put digitizer on provided table 1.4
5. Mount distance holder with FWI strain relief 1.5
6. Install UPS (Option) 1.6
7. Connect the cables 1.7
Installation
8. Switch digitizer on 2.1
9. Set-up digitizer at workstation 2.2
10. Fill in Site specific Data 2.3
11. Check software version 2.4
Completion of installation
12. Clean image plates 3.1
13. Check technical image quality of the digitizer 3.2
14. Test the optional UPS 3.3
15. Save hand-over test file 3.4
16. Hand-over the system to the Clinical Application Specialist 3.5
17. Fill in "Site and System Data" and "Installation Report" form 3.6


DD+DIS150.06E Functional Description
Chapter 2
List of Contents
1 CR30-X Digitizer as a part of the CR 30-X System ....................1

1.1 System Overview ............................................................................................ 1
1.2 CR30-X in a Nutshell....................................................................................... 1
1.3 NX Workstation in a Nutshell......................................................................... 2
1.4 Image Plates with IPs in a Nutshell ............................................................... 3
2 Workflow of the CR 30-X System................................................4
3 Hardware and Software ...............................................................5
4 Digitizer Boot-Up ..........................................................................6
5 Scanning .......................................................................................7
5.1 Description of most important Components for Scanning:........................ 8
5.2 Functions of Calibration Board: .................................................................... 8
5.3 Signal Corrections before and during Scan ................................................. 9
6 Stall Detection ............................................................................12
Document Node ID 12729759

eq_02_functional_e_template_v01

Edition 1, Revision 0 CR30-X Chapter 2 / I

Type 5175/100 Agfa Company Confidential
1 CR30-X Digitizer as a part of the CR 30-X System
1.1 System Overview

The CR30-X digitizer is part of the Digitizer NX Workstation
"CR 30-X System" which
comprises: Cassette
• Digitizer CR30-X
• NX Workstation
• Cassette with Image Plate
(IP)
Optional Components (not 517511ae.cdr
displayed)
• Printer (Drystar 5302) Figure 1
• Auto QC² Package
• Uninterruptible Power
Supply (UPS)
1.2 CR30-X in a Nutshell
Photo Multiplier Interface

(PMI) Board
Photo Multiplier Tube
Optic Module (PMT)
Erasure Unit
Cassette Polygon Mirror

Unit Laser Diode
Polygon Motor
Light
Chip Laser
Collector
Beam
Reader
Slow Scan
Unit
IP Run
517511ag.cdr
FireWire
Transport Calibration Cable to
Unit Board NX Workstation
Figure 2: CR30-X general Structure

Edition 1, Revision 0 CR30-X Chapter 2 / 1
Functional Description DD+DIS150.06E
Explanation of one scan cycle:
1) The user inserts the cassette with image plate (IP) into the digitizer
2) The chip reader reads the image plate data
3) The user enters the patient data at the the NX workstation and selects
the ID button to send the data to the digitizer
4) The cassette unit opens the cassette and pulls out the tray with IP
5) The transport unit drives the image plate to the slow scan unit
6) Via calibration board the digitizer determines the position of the polygon
mirror to synchronize scanning and digitizing.
7) The laser beam which is generated in the optic module scans the image
plate, while the slow scan unit drives the image plate
8) The blue emitted light is collected by the light collecter
9) The PMT converts light to current, which is converted to digital pixels by
the PMI board.
10) The digital image data are sent via FireWire Interface to the NX
workstation
11) The image plate is driven back by slow scan unit and transport unit to
the erasure unit: Several LED arrays erase the image plate.
12) The tranport unit puts the image plate back into the tray, and pushes the
image plate with tray into the cassette.
13) The cassette unit closes the cassette.
14) The red blinking LED at the front panel changes to green, indicating that
the scan cycle is finished.
15) The user removes the image plate for the next exposure.
1.3 NX Workstation in a Nutshell

The NX Workstation is a WIN2003 Server or WIN XP based Processing
Station with the NX software installed.
Every incoming image runs through an image processing (MUSICA).
The processed images are stored on the internal hard disk of the
NX Workstation. However, the NX Workstation can only provide a limited
amount of storage capacity. The final archiving must be realized either by
printed hardcopies or a PACS.
Moreover, the NX Workstation decodes the routing data and sends the image
data to the selected destinations (e.g. Printer, PACS).
For the NX Workstation a lot of licensed software options (e.g. Interactive

Image Processing, Annotation, Smart Print, etc.) can be purchased.
The CR30-X cannot be run together with ADC QS workstations.

Chapter 2 / 2 CR30-X Edition 1, Revision 0
Agfa Company Confidential Type 5175/100
1.4 Image Plates with IPs in a Nutshell
The cassettes are similar to the DX-S digitizer cassettes, however not
compatible.
The IPs are named "MD40" (MD = media definition; 40 = version).
These are flexible IPs that are also used in the previous digitizers,
except DX-S.
The tray is used as carrier to pull out the image plate and put it back into the
cassette. The tray only leaves the cassette for approx. 3 cm.
Shutter
Lock
Image plate
RF-tag
Tray
517511al.cdr
Figure 3: CR30-X Cassette with Image Plate "MD40"

2 Workflow of the CR 30-X System
Take exposure
1
5
Take cassette
for next exposure
Insert exposed Cassette
2 in Digitizer
3
Go to processing station
and select Patient:
The IP* cycle starts.
FireWire cable 4 Wait till IP* cycle

is finished (approx. 1 min.) 517502ah.cdr
*IP = Image Plate
Figure 4
Workflow of an examination with the CR30-X system in the view of a

radiologic technologist:
Step 1: Take the exposure.
Step 2: Insert the exposed cassette into the digitizer
Step 3: Go to processing station. Select the patient from the worklist and
select the "ID" button (ID stands for "identify"): The IP* cycle
starts.
Step 4: Wait till the IP* cycle is finished. This takes approx. 1 min.
The digitizer sends the image data during scanning (i.e. during
the IP cycle) to the processing station.
Step 5: Take out the cassette for the next examination.
*IP = Image Plate

3 Hardware and Software
Image Capture
IP Handling
Tag Reader
Digitizer
Handling
Cassette
Control
Control
Control
Control
Control
Agfa NEXUS Operating System Agfa NEXUS Operating System
Erasure Chip User NXApplication

Board Reader Interface Software
µ Contr.
E* µ Contr. TWAIN Interface
E* IP
Handling
Board Can FPGA FireWire FireWire CR30-X Server Error
E* Bus Interface Interface Application Viewer
Slow Scan
Board PMI Board
(PhotoMultiplier
µ Contr. Logger
Interface)
ASAP
CR30-X Service
Client
PMT Optics Calibration
E* PCBs board Harddisk
E*
517502ag.cdr
*E-Label
Slow Scan
Control
NX Workstation
Digitizer
Agfa NEXUS Operating System
Figure 5

4 Digitizer Boot-Up
CR30-X Boot-Up Audible Visible
Approx. 10 s.
No audible
Digitizer
activities
LED dark
Switch-On
Boot-up of PMI
and all other CAN nodes
repeat endless 3x
if required 1 beep
NX connected?
NO
2
Approx. 10 s.
Polygon audible
YES
Send Self Test 3

Signal to all SW modules
Error message
Selftest okay? in NX Error Viewer.
NO Boot-up stops
LED red blinking

YES
IP Clean-up
Cycle
Motors audible
Approx. 50 s.
Cassette or IP Warning message

found? in Error Viewer
YES
Remove Cassette
NO
or IP and continue
Initialize all Modules
= set all motors to HOME
Error message
Initialization okay? in NX Error Viewer.
NO Boot-up stops
Approx. 1 s.
YES
NO Wait till the NX

NX Viewer
sends "enable feeder"
No audible
running?
activities
message (LED blinks red)

green on
YES
LED
Digitizer idle
517502eb.cdr
Legend: 33 SW Modules:
- Image Capture Control
1 3 x beep indicates: PMI + CAN nodes are started up. - Cassette Handling Control
Connection only possible if - IP Handling Control
2 - Slow Scan Control
- FireWire cable connected
- ASAP service on NX started. This selftest is without motor actvities (except polygon).
It checks e.g. whether motors and sensors are connected.
Figure 6

5 Scanning
Laser Diode
6 Facet Polygon
EOL Sensor 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Geometric Correction 10
Sensors (1 to 16) 11
12
13
14
15
16
Calibration Board
BOL Sensor 517502ae.cdr
Figure 7

5.1 Description of most important Components for Scanning:
Laser Diode:
• Power max = . 45 mW
Polygon:
• 6 facets
• Ball bearings
• Run-up period approx. 5 sec.
• Follow-up period approx. 10 min.
Calibration Board
• BOL / EOL Sensor
• 16 pin diodes
5.2 Functions of Calibration Board:
• Geometric Correction:
To correct irregularities in the optical path, the digitizer measures at each
boot-up the timings of the laser beam between pin diode 1 and 2, 2 and 3 and
so on.
As a result a kind of "calibration curve" is created, which influences the
frequency of AD conversion. This corrects possible distortions.
• Jitter Correction:
To correct irregularities in the polygon run, the digitizer measures the timings
between the BOL and EOL signal during each scan. Certain irregularities,
which may be caused by external vibrations or the polygon ball bearings are
smoothed by calculating mean values of several scan lines.
• Synchronization of Polygon, Begin of Scan, Begin of Line and AD

Window:
When an IP is inserted the polygon starts up. The BOL/EOL sensors measure
the position of the polygon mirrors (they even detect each single facet)
When the IP arrives for scanning, the sensors of the calibration board detect
the IP edge and generate the begin of scan signal (BOS).
The begin of line signal (BOL) triggers a timer for switching on the laser beam
and the AD window.
The length of the AD window and "Laser On" depends on the image plate size.

BOL Signal at pin diodes during bootup EOL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Signal at BOL/EOL sensors during scan
Laser on/off during scan
AD Window
IP Width
517502ac.cdr
Note: Timings are unproportional distorted to show correlation between different signals
Figure 8
5.3 Signal Corrections before and during Scan
Introduction:
To compensate PMT sensitivity irregularities due to the previously collected
light, the light collector has a blue LED built in.
This blue LED creates a reference signals (REF LUM) before and during scan,
to correct the sensitivity of the PMT "on the fly" (HT correction).
Calibration of the "PMT - Light Collector System" at Production:

STEP 1: Adjusting blue LED
The blue LED is adjusted by the PMT electronics at initialization of the system
this way, that a defined output signal (LPV = Linear Pixel Value) is reached.
The voltage at the blue LED to reach the value is stored in the PMT EEPROM
as REF LUM value.
Parameters of REF LUM: Variations of LEDs; LED mounting position.

STEP 2: Determination of translucence of the system

An IP with 20µG is scanned by the system. The exact dose is measured by
production people and entered in the system. The analog output signal at the
PMT is measured by the system, put into a relation to the entered dose and
stored in the PMT EEPROM as REF CAL value.
Parameters of REF CAL: Overall translucence of light collector incl. PMT
sensitivity
STEP 3: Shading calibration

An IP with 20µG is scanned. A reference value for each pixel of each line and
each polygon facet is stored in the PMT Flash ROM.
Parameters: Translucence of Lightcollector - PMT system per pixel on the
scan line.
⇒ Signal corrections before scan: AUTOZERO

With laser and blue LED switched off, the system measures the output of the
PMT. This value is the AUTOZERO value.
Parameters: Noise of the PMT electronics; Remaining light
→ Error message if AUTOZERO value exceeds certain limit (e.g. covers
opened)
⇒ Signal corrections during scan: AUTOCAL and Shading Correction

AUTOCAL Correction:
During laser blank time, till the next facet scans a line, the blue LED is
switched on to measure the sensitivity of the PMT. By combining the
measured values of several lines the sensitivity is automatically adjusted (HT
at PMT)
Shading correction:
The digital value of each pixel is corrected with a correction factor determined
during shading calibration.

REF CAL
REF LUM Shading Calibration
PMT SN
Flash ROM*
EEPROM*
E-Label*
Connector* PMT
Light Collector
Blue LED
*Location of Connector, E-Label, EEPROM and Flash ROM simplified
517502ad.cdr
Figure 9

6 Stall Detection
Figure 10
Stall detection =
• Motor stall (home/end position) detection without the use of additional
sensors
• Made by evaluation of stepper motor control curve on the motor controller
chip
Advantage compared to home/end position detection via light sensors:

• Monitoring of motor run not only in home and end position, but also
between home and end position (except acceleration / deceleration time)
• Less sensors (costs, reliability) and cabling (costs).
How does it work in general:

• When the stepper motor is accelerating the stall detection is switched off,
as torque differs to much during acceleration.
• When the motor reaches a stable speed, e.g. after 200 steps, the stall
detection is active for a number of steps, e.g. 5000 steps: The motor
control curve is evaluated by the motor controller chip.

• When the torque increases and reaches a certain "switch off torque", as
the motor reaches the end position, the motor controller detects the stall
position and drives the motor a certain number of steps (e.g. 50 steps) till
it stops.
• During decelration time the stall detection is switched off, as torque differs
to much during deceleration.
• Rubber pieces in the end position support that the motor can be driven
with relatively high speed towards the end position.
• If the torque increases to the "switch-off" torque before the motor is
supposed to reach the stall position, the motor is also stopped. The
software however "knows" that this stop comes too early and issues an
error message (e.g. "IP jam").
NOTE:
The motor curves shown above are simplified. In reality the motor speed can
be reduced just before the stall position, or can even be reduced in several
steps before it stops.

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.06E Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instructions
Chapter 3.1
List of Contents
1 General Safety Guideline ........................................................ 1
2 Intended Use ............................................................................ 1
3 Labels in and on the Device.................................................... 1
4 Safety Notes for Service Actvities.......................................... 4

4.1 Safety Notes for Installation Planning ............................................................... 4
4.2 Safety Notes for Installation ............................................................................... 5
4.3 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work...................... 5
4.3.1 General Safety Note for all Service Actvities ......................................................... 5
4.3.2 Safety Note for Replacement of the Power Supply ............................................... 6
4.3.3 Safety Note for Replacement of Cassette Edge Sensor........................................ 6
4.3.4 Safety Note for Replacement of PMT with Light Collector..................................... 6
4.3.5 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacements ............................................. 7

eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v01

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled
Edition 1, Revision 0 CR30-X Chapter 3.1 / I
Repair and Service
1 General Safety Guideline
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
• Read the Generic Safety Directions in chapter 0 of the Technical
Documentation prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance
task on the equipment.
• Strictly observe all safety directions within the Generic Safety Directions
and on the product.
2 Intended Use
This device must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP). The digitizer is part of a system, consisting of X-ray
cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates and a workstation where the
Xray cassettes are identified and the resulting digital image information is
further processed and routed. It is intended that this device is only operated in
a radiological environment by qualified staff.
3 Labels in and on the Device

WARNING:
Risk of hand injuries if cassette
edge sensor is activated and hand
or finger is inserted in cassette
entry.
• Keep fingers / hand away from
cassette unit entry when a
cassette is inserted.
• Do not activate cassette edge
sensor by hand.
517531aa.cdr
Figure 1: Labels in the Front

Edition 1, Revision 0 CR30-X Chapter 3.1 / 1
Repair and Service
Safety Guidelines / General Repair Instructions DD+DIS150.06E
Manufacturer AGFA GEVA ERT N.V.

Septestraat 27-2640-Mortsel-BELGIUM
Type 5175/1 00 S/N 1011 Da te: 200 6-07

.0A 50 -60Hz
100-120/220-240V 2 .0/1
Ma de in Germa ny
Pei ssenb erg
July 200 6
Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V.

Septestraat 27-2640-Mortsel-BELGIUM
517531ae.cdr
Type 5175/100 S/N 1011 Date: 2006-07
100-120/220-240V 2.0/1.0A 50-60Hz
Made in Germany
Peissenberg
July 2006
Figure 2: Labels in the rear
NOTE:
Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V.
The type label is located in the rear. It Septestraat 27-2640-Mortsel-BELGIUM
shows Type 5175/100 S/N 1011 Date: 2006-07
• Manufacturer 100-120/220-240V 2.0/1.0A 50-60Hz
• Type number Made in Germany

Peissenberg
• Serial number
July 2006
• Input voltage, current and

frequeny Figure 3
• Production date
• Production site
WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock if
supplementary earth connector is
disconnected with one hand and
the other hand touches a ground Figure 4
connection (e.g. rear cover of the
digitizer).
First switch off the digitizer and
remove the mains cable before you
remove the supplementary earth
connector.
NOTE:
With covers closed the digitizer is a
Class 1 laser product and not
dangerous to the human eye or skin.
Figure 5

Chapter 3.1 / 2 CR30-X Edition 1, Revision 0
Repair and Service
CAUTION:
Risk of damage of the PMI board if
FireWire connector is inserted
wrong. Figure 6
Insert the FireWire connector in the
rear as indicated on the sticker.
WARNING:
50 mW Laser (Class 3B) in the
OPTIC MODULE may cause eye
injuries.
• Do not keep tools in the laser
beam when the device is switched
on or the CASSETTE UNIT OPEN
SAFETY SWITCH is overridden
with a service key.
• Do not open the cover of the
OPTIC MODULE.
DANGER
LASER LIGHT
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE
TO BEAM
DIODE LASER
120 mW MAX OUTPUT
at 640-670 nm
CLASS IIIb LASER PRODUCT
Figure 7

Repair and Service
4 Safety Notes for Service Actvities
4.1 Safety Notes for Installation Planning
WARNING:
If the digitizer is installed in the examination room, scattered radiation
may decrease the image quality of the exposed cassette.
If the CR 30-X is installed inside of an X-ray room it must be protected from
stray radiation by proper shielding. See chapter 11, Installation Planning,
section "Accessories".
WARNING:
The structure and stability of the table used, need to be suitable in relation with
the size and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive
shock and vibrations from other sources.
WARNING:
Risk of retakes due to power loss during scanning.
It is strongly recommended to install a UPS for the digitizer and the NX
workstation in case of unstable power conditions.
WARNING:
The digitizer uses high voltage. Electrical shock possible.
• A ground fault interrupter (GFI) (IN = 30 mA) must be installed at a
suitable point in the circuit (in compliance with VDE 664).
• Ensure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable disconnecting
device in the internal installation fitted near the CR 30-X and that it is
easily accessible
WARNING:
Vibrations caused by transport in a truck (mobile usage) or
earthquakes may cause that the digitizer falls off the table.
During transport in a truck for mobile usage and at installations in earthquake
areas the digitizer has to be secured by the optional Wall Fixation Kit. See
chapter 11, Installation Planning, section "Accessories".

Repair and Service
4.2 Safety Notes for Installation
WARNING:
The digitizer is heavy (98 kg; 216.1 lb). Risk of injuries when lifting the
digitizer.
• At least three people have to lift the digitizer from one position to the
other.
• Use proper shoe and hand protection when lifting the digitizer.
4.3 Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work
4.3.1 General Safety Note for all Service Actvities
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the digitizer: Cut or abrasion possible.
CAUTION: Cassette Unit open

Risk of injuries if the cassette unit Safety Switch (S2)
open safety switch is overridden
with a service key.
In this case keep your hands and
garment away from the digitizer.
517531ab.cdr
Figure 8

Repair and Service
4.3.2 Safety Note for Replacement of the Power Supply
DANGER:
If the cables at the input side of the power supply are mounted wrong,
the housing of the digitizer can be connected to high voltage. Risk of
live.
Mount the cables at the power supply as indicated in the replacement
instructions
4.3.3 Safety Note for Replacement of Cassette Edge Sensor
CAUTION:
The nuts of the cassette edge sensor mounting can be lost very easily.
• Only loosen the screws of the CASSETTE EDGE SENSOR approx. 2
turns.
• Always have a "small parts kit" CM+9 5175 9070 0 with you: This
contains 2 screws and nuts for the cassette edge sensor mounting.
4.3.4 Safety Note for Replacement of PMT with Light Collector
CAUTION:
The light collector can break when mechanically stressed.
Handle the light collector with great care.

Repair and Service
4.3.5 Electrical Check after Power Supply Replacements
WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the digitizer metal housing may lead to
electric shocks.
In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective
earth resistance according to the national regulations.
The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Details see..

1 Perform the basic protective earth test 4.3.5.1
2 Perform the electrical check according to 4.3.5.2
National Regulations.
4.3.5.1 Basic Protective Earth Test

(1) Use a multimeter that is
capable to measure a
resistance < 1 Ohm
(2) Put one probe at the ground
connector of the mains input
200
(3) Put the other probe at a few
metallic parts, the customer
could touch. 517511ai.cdr
The electrical resistance has to
be ≤ 0.2 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 9.
Figure 9
(4) Insert the power cord at the

digitizer side; leave it
disconnected at the wall side.
connector of the mains
connector.
(6) Put the other probe at a few 517509ah.cdr
could touch.
The electrical resistance in this
case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 10. Figure 10

Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2
Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the digitizer for
loose grounding connections!
4.3.5.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations
(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
IMPORTANT:
The electrical checks that have to be performed in certain intervals (e.g. each
12 months) or after certain service actions (repair and/or maintenance)
depend on National Regulations.
Example for Germany: BGV A3 and DIN VDE 0751 or subsequent
regulations.

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.06E Tools and auxiliary means
Chapter 3.2
List of Contents
1 Machine specific Tools ................................................................1

1.1 Required Tools................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Recommended Tools...................................................................................... 2
2 Software Tools for the CR30-X on the Processing Station ......2

2.1 Service Client .................................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 Info Counter ...................................................................................................... 6
2.1.2 E-Label.............................................................................................................. 7
2.1.3 SW-Versioning .................................................................................................. 8
2.1.4 Service Activity Log........................................................................................... 9
2.1.5 Error Statistics................................................................................................. 10
2.1.6 HOT Report..................................................................................................... 11
2.1.7 SW Upload...................................................................................................... 12
2.1.8 Diagnose Cycle............................................................................................... 14
2.1.9 Explain Error Code.......................................................................................... 15
2.1.10 Endurance Run Cycle ..................................................................................... 16
2.1.11 Selftest of Device ............................................................................................ 17
2.1.12 Calibration....................................................................................................... 18
2.1.13 Site specific data............................................................................................. 19
2.1.14 Device specific data ........................................................................................ 20
2.1.15 Maintenance Indicator..................................................................................... 21
2.1.16 Backup & Restore ........................................................................................... 22
2.2 Remote Desktop............................................................................................ 23

eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v01


Repair and Service
1 Machine specific Tools

The listing of machine specific tools is divided in required tools and
recommended tools.
Required tools: They are required for installation, repair or troubleshooting.

Recommended tools: They may facilitate installation, repair or troubleshooting
1.1 Required Tools
In addition to the conventional service tools which every service engineer has
in his toolbox, the following tools are required for service on the digitizer:
Tool Part Number Purpose

ADC Screen Cleaner CM+9 9999 9288 0 To clean the Image Plates
(4 bottles)
Anti-static wrist strap CM+9 9999 0830 0 To avoid static discharges
on electronic components
Service key CM+9 0426 6309 0 To override the safety
switch
Vacuum Cleaner Commercially To clean the digitizer
available. See also during maintenance
note next page.
NOTE:
Agfa has a vacuum cleaner in its service spare parts assortment:
Description Order number
Vacuum cleaner
220/240V, 50Hz CM+9 9999 0895 0
Dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x) CM+9 9999 0896 0

Repair and Service
Tools and auxiliary means DD+DIS150.06E
1.2 Recommended Tools
Tool Part Number Purpose

Canned air Commercially To remove dust from
available modules after
disassembling from device
Loupe 8x CM+9 9579 9904 0 To check image quality of
films at the lightbox
Service PC Commercially • To copy the digitizer

available. software from PC to CD
ROM or USB stick
• To evaluate the
infocounter offline
USB memory stick Commercially To transfer data between
available the processing station and
the service PC
NOTE:
As some screws are difficult 3 mm,
with ball-shaped head
accessible, it is recommended to
have a 3 mm hex key with ball-
shaped head and a 6 mm magnetic 6 mm (magnetic)
hex key in the tools assortment.
2 Software Tools for the CR30-X on the Processing Station

Following software tools are available:
Tool Purpose Refer to ...

Service Client Main service tool Section 2.1
Remote Desktop Remote Service Section 2.2
The following sections describe these tools.

Repair and Service
2.1 Service Client

• The "Service Client" is the service software for the CR30-X.
• It is installed on the processing station in production
• It also contains the software (i.e. program files for the different nodes)
for the digitizer
• Updates of the CR30-X service client are available via MEDNET –
GSO Library – Computed Radiography – CR Digitizers – CR30-X
• It is started via menu:
All Programs - Agfa CR 30-X - Service Client
Figure 1: CR30-X Service Client menus

Repair and Service
NOTE:
It is possible to use the CR30-X service client also on the service PC.
Following functions can be accessed:
Directly after installation:

• Function “Explain Error Code”
After Restore of a CR30-X backup file:

• View Infocounter
• View E-Label entries
• View Service Activity Log
• View Error Statistics
Prerequisites for Installation:

• Windows 2000 or Windows XP (home or professional)
• .Net Visual J# (to be obtained via www.microsoft.com)
Update of the Service Client on the processing station:
(1) Select "Start - Control Panel - Administrative Tools"

(2) Select Services
(3) Double-click on "ASAPService"
(4) Select "Stop"
(5) Close the "Error Viewer"
(6) Select "Control Panel - Add or Remove Programs"
(7) Select "CR30-X"
(8) Select "Remove"
(9) Wait till program removal is finished
(10) Execute the updated CR30-X program file
(11) When fisnished: Start the "ASAP Service"

Repair and Service
Following menus are further described in detail:
Menu Refer to ...

General Device Info
Info Counter Section 2.1.1
E-Label Section 2.1.2
SW-Versioning Section 2.1.3
Reporting
Service Activity Log Section 2.1.4
Error Statistics Section 2.1.5
HOT Report Section 2.1.6
Modification
SW Upload Section 2.1.7
Analysis & Repair
Diagnose Cycle Section 2.1.8
Explain Error Code Section 2.1.9
Endurance Run Cycle Section 2.1.10
Selftest of Device Section 2.1.11
Preventive Maintenance
Calibration Section 2.1.12
Configuration
Site specific data Section 2.1.13
Device specific data Section 2.1.14
Maintenance Indicator Section 2.1.15
Backup & Restore Section 2.1.16

Repair and Service
2.1.1 Info Counter
PURPOSE The Info Counter provides device-specific information on:

• the hardware components,
• the software components,
• the modification history (installation, repair, maintenance)
• the history of occurred errors, warnings, and retries
• the used image plates, cassettes
It facilitates recognition of failures and allows to reduce the repair time

in the field or the repair center.
USAGE (1) Select "General Device Info - Info Counter"

(2) Select a List Name, e.g. Error History with CBF by clicking once on the
desired entry in the left pane.
The entries of the list are displayed on the right pane.
(3) Select a List Entry Name by clicking once on the desired entry in the right
pane.
The attributes of the selected entry are displayed in the bottom pane.
Figure 2

Repair and Service
2.1.2 E-Label
PURPOSE The 'E-labels' (5 pieces altogether; see Figure 3) keep device and module
specific data, like module serial number, last error codes or module specific
parameters.
Purpose of the E-Labels:
o Automatic tracking of module exchange (automatic infocounter entries)
o The returned, defective module has all required data in the E-Label to
make fault investigations in production
The E-label contains module specific data, avoiding adjustments and loading
of hardware modification floppies at replacements.
USAGE (1) Select "General Device Info - E-Label"
(2) Select the desired E-Label
Figure 3

Repair and Service
2.1.3 SW-Versioning
PURPOSE With this tool it is possible
• to check if the software versions currently installed on the

processing station match those installed on the digitizer.
• to upload the digitizer software to a single, two or all 3 digitizer nodes.
It shows the same screen and allows the same function like the
"Modification - SW Upload" menu.
USAGE (1) Select "General Device Info - SW Versioning"
(2) Select "Get installed version"
Figure 4
IMPORTANT:
The installed versions on the PMI board, IP Handling board (HDL Board)
and Slow Scan Board (SSC Board) have always to be the same.

Repair and Service
2.1.4 Service Activity Log
PURPOSE Logfile of all actions carried out by the service staff the last 20 days
(“first in, first out” principle).
The service person name associated with each logfile entry depends on the
CR30-X service client login. Default: crservice.
Preferably use your name for login.
USAGE (1) Select "Reporting - Service Activity Log"
(2) To save it on the processing station select "save as"
Figure 5

Repair and Service
2.1.5 Error Statistics
PURPOSE This tool helps to determine the frequency of occurrence for specific errors.
It us used for troubleshooting.
USAGE (1) Select "Reporting - Error Statistics"
Figure 6

Repair and Service
2.1.6 HOT Report
PURPOSE This tool gives a summary of the last cassette cycle. The most important
events that happened in the digitizer during this cycle are reported.
It is overwritten with each new scan cycle.
USAGE (1) Select "Reporting - HOT Report"
(2) Select “Save as” to save it on a backup medium (e.g. hard disk or USB
stick)
Figure 7

Repair and Service
2.1.7 SW Upload
PURPOSE With this tool it is possible
• to check if the software versions currently installed on the

processing station match those installed on the digitizer.
• to upload the digitizer software to a single, two or all 3 digitizer nodes.
It shows the same screen and allows the same function like the
"Modification - SW Upload" menu.
To upload the software to the digitizer may be required in following cases:
• After replacement of the PMI board, slow scan board or IP handling

board
• To perform a software update (bug-fixing) or SW upgrade (new

functionality)
USAGE (1) Select "General Device Info - SW Versioning"
(3) If the version on the PC is newer, select the desired node
(4) Select "Upload selected node"

Repair and Service
Figure 8
IMPORTANT:
The installed versions on the PMI board, IP Handling board (HDL Board)
and Slow Scan Board (SSC Board) have always to be the same.

Repair and Service
2.1.8 Diagnose Cycle
PURPOSE Analyzation of IP handling problems by running partial actions step by step,

forward or backward.
USAGE (1) Select "Analysis & Repair - Diagnose Cycle"
(2) Put a cassette into the digitizer
(3) Activate one of the grey displayed actions
Figure 9
NOTE:
For a diagnose cycle in the cassette unit only it is possible to open the
cassette unit, insert a service key in the cassette unit open safety switch and
view the image plate.

Repair and Service
2.1.9 Explain Error Code
PURPOSE Explanation of error codes reported by the error viewer.
USAGE (1) Select "Analysis & Repair - Explain error code"
(2) Enter the error code
(3) Select "Look-up"
Figure 10

Repair and Service
2.1.10 Endurance Run Cycle
PURPOSE Allows to run any amount of cycles with/ without scanning and/ or erasure.
This can be helpful when investigating sporadic image plate handling
failures.
USAGE (1) Select "Analysis & Repair - Endurance run Cycle"
(2) Put a cassette into the digitizer
(3) Select the number of cycles and delay between cycles (if required)
(4) Select "Scanning" and/or "Erasure" if required
Figure 11

Repair and Service
2.1.11 Selftest of Device
PURPOSE The ‘Selftest of Device” menu allows to reset the digitizer via CR30-X service
client. The functional sequence of the selftest is identical to the selftest
during switch-on. Refer to chapter 2, Functional Description.
USAGE (1) Select "Analysis & Repair - Selftest of device"
(2) Wait till the digitizer has rebooted (takes approx. 1 min.)
Figure 12

Repair and Service
2.1.12 Calibration
PURPOSE Perform a shading calibration
USAGE (1) Select "Preventive Maintenance - Calibration"
(2) Expose a cassette as indicated
(3) Enter the cassette
(4) Select "Calibrate".
For details see also chapter 3.6, Adjustments and Calibrations
Figure 13

Repair and Service
2.1.13 Site specific data
PURPOSE Define the site specific data for exact identification of the digitizer. The data
are part of the infocounter and the E-labels.
USAGE (1) Select "Configuration - Site specific data"
(2) Enter the required data
(3) Select "Confirm Identification of connected device"
(4) Select "Save"
Figure 14

Repair and Service
2.1.14 Device specific data
PURPOSE Read-out the device specific data which were configured in production.
USAGE (1) Select "Configuration - Device specific data"
(2) Select "Read Data"
Figure 15
NOTE:
The Device specific Data are “read-only”.

Repair and Service
2.1.15 Maintenance Indicator
PURPOSE 1 Configure whether the screen "Preventive Maintenance required" shall

pop-up at the processing station if 12.000 IP cycles or 1 year are over
since the last reset of the maintenance indicator.
2 Reset the maintenance indicator counter.
USAGE (1) Select "Maintenance Indicator"
(2) Select "confirm" to reset the time/cycle counter
(3) Switch off/on (default = on) the maintenance indicator
Figure 16

Repair and Service
2.1.16 Backup & Restore
PURPOSE Store device specific settings and information in a backup Zip file
Restore device specific settings and information when required.
To make a Backup is required in following cases
• At preventive maintenance
• After replacements of parts
• After software update or upgrade
To make a Restore is required in following case:
• After replacement of the processing station
Backup:
(1) Select "Backup & Restore"
(2) Select "Backup selected files" to perform a backup
Restore:
(1) Select "Backup & Restore"
(2) Select "Restore selected files" to perform a restore
Figure 17

Repair and Service
2.2 Remote Desktop
PURPOSE Remote connection to the processing station and so to the digitizer.
USAGE (1) Connect the service PC to the network where the processing station
with digitizer is located (e.g. via Agfa SRSS)
(2) On the local PC select ‘Start – Programs – Accessories –

Communications – Remote Desktop’
(3) Enter the hostname or IP address of the processing station
(4) Select “Connect”
(5) On the processing station start the CR30-X service client
Figure 18
NOTE:
• The processing station is by default enabled for ‘remote desktop’.
Enabling for remote desktop is done via function ‘START – Control
Panel – System – Remote”
• If the CR30-X service client is started in a remote session, following

functions are not accessible, as they require presence of a service
engineer at the digitizer:
o Diagnose Cycle
o Endurance run cycle
o Calibration

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.06E Troubleshooting
Chapter 3.3
List of Contents
1 Troubleshooting Strategy for the CR30-X .................................1

1.1 Collecting Information concerning the Symptom........................................ 2
1.2 Find Information concerning the Defect ....................................................... 3
1.3 Solving the Problem ....................................................................................... 3

eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v01


Repair and Service
1 Troubleshooting Strategy for the CR30-X
For efficient troubleshooting of the CR30-X it is strongly recommended to

follow the troubleshooting strategy as provided here:
It is divided in three parts:
# Action Details see ...

1 Collect information concerning the symptoms Section 1.1
2 Find information concerning the defect Section 1.2
3 Solve the problem Section 1.3
2 Get Error Code

1 Customer information
Service Client
Reporting
Error Statistics
Symptom
3 Get Infocounter
4 Consult Service Client
Troubleshooting Guide General Device Info
MEDNET, GSO Infocounter
Computed Radiography 5 Reboot
CR Digitizers Service Client
CR 30 - X Analysis & Repair
Troubleshooting Guide
Selftest of Device
Defect
6 Check suspicious
Infocounter entries 7 Check Error Codes
Infocounter Service Client
Evaluation Analysis & Repair
in chapter 3.2
Explain Error Code
8 Repair 9 Verify Repair

Perform verification as
Refer to chapter 3.5, indicated in chapter 3.5,
Replacements Replacements
Symptom
Solution
517533aa.cdr
Figure 1

Repair and Service
Troubleshooting DD+DIS150.06E
1.1 Collecting Information concerning the Symptom

Following information sources are available:
Reference to Information Source

Figure 1
1 Customer information:
The customer will tell the symptoms from his point of view,
e.g. IP jam with a certain cassette.
This can be important information when evaluating the
infocounter.
2 Get error code:
(1) Select "Start - All Programs - Agfa CR30-X - Service
Client"
(2) In the Service Client select menu "Reporting - Error
Statistics"
(3) Write down the five most frequent errors.
3 Get infocounter:
(1) In the Service Client select menu "Entire Device -
Infocounter"
(2) In the error history check the errors that occurred in the
timeframe of the reported device malfunction
The following steps are only required in case
• the processing station cannot be used for further
infocounter evaluation
• it is required to send further information to the support
center
(3) In the Service Client select "Backup & Restore"
(4) Select checkbox "Backup only infocounter"
(5) Select "Backup selected files"
(6) Define name and destination for the backup file
(7) Copy it to a USB memory stick
(8) E-Mail the infocounter to the support center

Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5175/100) 2006-07-17
Repair and Service
1.2 Find Information concerning the Defect

Figure 1
4 Consult Troubleshooting Guide:
(1) Consult the latest "CR30-X Troubleshooting Guide". It
is available in menu "Computed radiography - CR
Digitizers - CR30-X - Troubleshooting Guide"
(2) Check whether the symptom you experienced is
already described in the Troubleshooting Guide
5 Reboot:
(1) In the Service Client select menu "Analysis & Repair –
Selftest of device"
(2) This will initiate a thorough self test of the digitizer
(Same like selftest after switch on. For details refer to
chapter 2 “Functional description)
6 Check suspicious infocounter entries:
(1) Evaluate the infocounter as described in section 3.2,
Tools
7 Check Error Codes:
(1) In the Service Client select menu "Analysis & Repair -
Explain Error Code"
(2) Check description and explanation
NOTE:
For IP jam problems it may also be required to perform a "Diagnose Cycle".
This allows checking of the IP run through the digitizer step by step. For more
information refer to section 3.2, Tools.
1.3 Solving the Problem

Figure 1
8 Repair:
(1) Repair the digitizer as described in section 3.5,
Replacements - or -
if a software update solves the problem, perform a
software update as described in section 3.2, Tools.
9 Verify Repair:
(1) Verify the repair as described in section 3.5, (for
mechanical replacements) and the enclosure
document (for software update) respectively.

Electrical and mechanical
DD+DIS150.06E codings, fuses, LED's
Chapter 3.4
List of Contents
1 LEDs inside Digitizer....................................................................1
2 Switches........................................................................................3
3 Fuses .............................................................................................3

eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v01


1 LEDs inside Digitizer
In the table below the LED status and their meaning are explained.
Board LED Meaning

User blue Erasure cycle active
Interface
Board green Ready / Stand-by
green flashing Scan cycle active
red Service Mode
red flashing Boot-up / no connection to processing

station / error
PMI board red LED L1#12 Fire Wire Connection available. Default:
on
red LED L2#12 FireWire 3.3 V available. Default: on
red LED LD52 Reset of PMI active. Only on during
reset of the PMI (e.g. during power on or
SW installation)
red LED LD30 FireWire 5 V available.
Default on.
red LED LD45 Voltage OK' signal from DC/DC
converter for PMT-Board positive supply
voltage. Default on.
converter for PMT-Board negative
supply voltage. Default on.
red LED LD47 'Voltage OK' signal from DC/DC
converter for supply voltage of
analogous part on PMI-Board.
Default on.
converter for
CAN bus supply voltage. Default on.
red LED LD50 Not used
red LED LD2 5V voltage present. Default on.
red LED LD31 3,3V voltage present. Default on.
red LED LD32 1,5 voltage present. Default on.


codings, fuses, LED's DD+DIS150.06E
PMI board red LED LD51 FPGA configuration done. Default: On.
Only off during programming (i.e. SW
Installation)
red LED LD33 For R&D purpose only. Default off
converter for optics board positive
converter for optics board negative
converter for calibration board positive
converter for calibration board positive
IP Handling Red LD2 Power +5V present. Default on.
Board
Slow Scan red LED LD2 Power +24 V present. Default on.
Unit Board


2 Switches
Board Switch Position meaning
IP handling board S1 (button switch) Reset of board if button
is pressed. Function for
R&D only.
S2 = on (default) Normal operation
S2 = off Debug position (for
R&D only)
Slow Scan Unit board S1 (button switch) Reset of board if button

is pressed. Function for
R&D only.
S2 = on (default) Normal operation
S2 = off Debug position (for
R&D only)
3 Fuses
IMPORTANT:
Defective fuses are not exchanged at the digitizer.
Replace the board instead.


Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.06E Replacement of Parts
Chapter 3.5
List of Contents
1 Replacing the Covers...................................................................1

1.1 Replacing the Front Cover ............................................................................. 1
1.2 Replacing the Left Cover................................................................................ 3
1.3 Removing the Rear Cover .............................................................................. 5
1.4 Replacing the right cover............................................................................... 6
1.5 Replacing the Top Cover................................................................................ 8
2 Replacements in Cassette Unit.................................................10

2.1 Replacing the Antistatic Brush Cassette Unit Entry ................................. 10
2.2 Replacing the Cassette Edge Sensor ......................................................... 11
2.3 Replacing the Cassette Fixation Unit.......................................................... 13
2.4 Replacing the Cassette Opener Unit........................................................... 15
2.5 Replacing the Cassette Unlocking Unit ...................................................... 20
2.6 Replacing the Chip Reader .......................................................................... 21
2.7 Replacing the Drawer Unit ........................................................................... 23
2.8 Replacing the Erasure Unit .......................................................................... 25
2.9 Replacing the Input Rollers ......................................................................... 26
2.10 Replacing the IP Handling Board ................................................................ 30
2.11 Replacing the Permanent Magnets ............................................................. 31
2.12 Replacing the Roller IP Sensor.................................................................... 33
2.13 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Roller Clamping.................... 35
2.14 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Drawer ................................... 37
2.15 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Roller ..................................... 39
2.16 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Opener................................... 40
2.17 Replacing the User Interface Board ............................................................ 42
3 Replacements at Scan Module .................................................44

3.1 Replacing the Antistatic Brush Scan Module Entry .................................. 44

eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v01


3.2 Replacing the Calibration Board..................................................................46
3.3 Replacing the Optic Module .........................................................................55
3.4 Replacing the PMI Power Distribution Board .............................................60
3.5 Replacing the PMI Board ..............................................................................62
3.6 Replacing the PMT with Light Collector......................................................64
3.7 Replacing the Scan Rollers ..........................................................................68
3.8 Replacing the Slow Scan Board...................................................................70
3.9 Replacing the Slow Scan Unit ......................................................................72
4 Replacements at Mounting Rack ............................................. 74

4.1 Replacing the Cassette Unit open Safety Switch .......................................74
4.2 Replacing the Distributor Board ..................................................................76
4.3 Replacing the Power Supply ........................................................................78

Chapter 3.5 / II CR30-X Edition 1, Revision 0

Repair and Service
1 Replacing the Covers
1.1 Replacing the Front Cover
REQUIRED SPARE PART:

CM+9 5175 1530 X
Figure 1
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
10 min
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Pull out cassette unit
B
A
A
Figure 2


Repair and Service
Replacement of Parts DD+DIS150.06E
(2) Remove 3 upper screws
Figure 3
(3) Remove 3 lower screws
Figure 4
(4) Press two handles and pull out

front cover approx. 5 cm
(5) Disconnect cable at user
interface board. See Figure 5.
(6) Remove front cover
Figure 5


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order
Verification: (1) Switch on the digitizer

(2) Wait till the green light at the user interface lights up
(takes approx. 1 min.)
Result: The front cover is replaced.
1.2 Replacing the Left Cover

CM+9 5175 1503 0
Figure 6
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
10 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
(2) Remove top cover. See 1.5
B
A
A
Figure 7
(3) Remove 3 screws of the left

cover
(4) Remove left cover
Figure 8
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The left cover is replaced.


Repair and Service
1.3 Removing the Rear Cover
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
15 min
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Disconnect cables
(2) Remove Top cover.
See section 1.5
(3) Remove left cover.
See section 1.2
(4) Remove right cover.
See 1.4
(5) Remove screws of the rear Figure 9
cover
(6) Remove rear cover
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The rear cover is replaced.


Repair and Service
1.4 Replacing the right cover

CM+9 51751 5041 X
Figure 10
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
10 min
DISASSEMBLY:
(2) Remove top cover. See 1.5
(3) Remove upper cover
B
A
A
Figure 11


Repair and Service
(4) Remove 3 screws of the right

cover
(5) Remove right cover
Figure 12
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The right cover is replaced.


Repair and Service
1.5 Replacing the Top Cover

CM+9 5175 1540 0
Figure 13
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
5 min
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Pull out cassette unit (A, B)
(2) Remove 3 screws of the upper
cover (C)
(3) Remove upper cover
B
A
A
Figure 14


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The top cover is replaced.


Repair and Service
2 Replacements in Cassette Unit
2.1 Replacing the Antistatic Brush Cassette Unit Entry

CM+9 5160 5006 X
Figure 15
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm, 2 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
90 min
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Remove front cover.
See section 1.1
(2) Remove cassette opener unit.
See section 2.4
(3) Remove upper and lower
antistatic brush. See Figure 16.
Figure 16
ASSEMBLY:


Repair and Service

(3) Insert an unexposed cassette
(4) Identify the cassette at the processing station
(5) Confirm, that the image arrived at the processing station
(6) Delete the image
Result: The Antistatic Brush Cassette Unit Entry is replaced.
2.2 Replacing the Cassette Edge Sensor

CM+9 5175 9060 X
Figure 17
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm Small size
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min
CAUTION:
The nuts of the cassette edge sensor mounting can be lost very easily.
• Only loosen the screws of the cassette edge sensor approx. 2 turns.
• Always have a "small parts kit" CM+9 5175 9070 0 with you: This
contains 2 spare screws and nuts for the cassette edge sensor
mounting.


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
2
See section 1.1
(2) Remove cables at cassette
edge sensor
(3) Open the two screws approx. 2
turns 1
1
(4) Slide out the cassette edge
sensor 3
Figure 18
ASSEMBLY:
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT:
(2) Perform a "cassette edge sensor" adjustment. Refer to chapter 3.6,
adjustments.
(3) Mount front cover. See section 1.1

Result: The cassette edge sensor is replaced.


Repair and Service
2.3 Replacing the Cassette Fixation Unit

CM+9 5175 9040 X
Figure 19
IMPORTANT:
The cassette fixation unit is delivered with the IP handling board.
Reason: The IP handling board contains parameters for the steps for
clamping the cassette.
When finished with the exchange of the cassette fixation unit, also exchange
the IP handling board (part of delivery)!
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm,
REQUIRED TIME:
90 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 2.4
(2) Remove cassette fixation unit
Figure 20
ASSEMBLY:

(7) Repeat steps (1) to (6) with each cassette format the customer is using.
IMPORTANT:
In case the boot-up is not successful, check following:
• Is cable connected at user interface board
• Is cable between chip reader and IP handling board connected
at P18
Result: The cassette fixation unit is replaced.


Repair and Service
2.4 Replacing the Cassette Opener Unit

CM+9 5175 5200 X
Figure 21
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm,
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min
CAUTION:
IP jams possible if IP guide plate is deformed.
Do not bend IP guide plate at removal.
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove Erasure unit. A
See section 2.8.
(3) Push drawer unit 1 to 2 cm to B
the front (A)
(4) Slide IP guide plate to the left
and lift it out. (B)
Figure 22


Repair and Service
(5) Remove all cables at IP

handling board except P28
(6) Open all cable holders at
cassette unit
(7) Remove IP handling board
Figure 23
(8) Open screws of roller stepper

motor M5 about ½ turn (A)
(9) Remove screws of upper part
transport unit (B)
Figure 24
(10) Remove 2 screws of upper part

transport unit (right hand side)
Figure 25


Repair and Service
(11) Disconnect cable at roller IP

sensor
Figure 26
(12) Put upper part transport unit as

far as possible to the rear
Figure 27
(13) Turn a few turns at spindle of

cassette fixation (A)
(14) Remove two screws at the front
(B, C) A B
Figure 28


Repair and Service
(15) Remove 2 screws at cassette

fixation unit
Figure 29
(16) Remove 4 screws in the inner

part of the cassette unit
(17) Take out the cassette unit.
Figure 30
(18) Remove cassette unlocking unit
Figure 31


Repair and Service
(19) Remove the cassette fixation

unit.
Figure 32
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount the cassette opener unit in reverse order

IMPORTANT:
• Is cable between chip reader and IP handling board connected
at P 18
Result: The cassette opener unit is replaced.


Repair and Service
2.5 Replacing the Cassette Unlocking Unit

CM+9 5175 5600 X
Figure 33
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove cable at P30 of IP
handling board
Figure 34
(3) Open cable holders

(4) Open 3 screws at the lower
right hand side
(5) Remove the cassette locking
unit
Figure 35


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The cassette locking unit is replaced.
2.6 Replacing the Chip Reader

CM+9 0486 1417 0
Figure 36
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm Small size
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove IP handling board.
See section 2.10
(3) Pull at toothed belt of cassette
opener stepper motor to move
the cassette opener upwards
(4) Disconnect cable at chip reader
(5) Remove screw Figure 37
(6) Remove chip reader
ASSEMBLY:

IMPORTANT:
• Is cable between chip reader and IP handling board connected at P18
Result: The Chip Reader is replaced.


Repair and Service
2.7 Replacing the Drawer Unit

CM+9 5175 6100 X
Figure 38
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm 5,5 mm (magnetic)
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min
CAUTION:
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
See section 2.8.
(3) Remove IP guide plate B
Figure 39


Repair and Service
(4) Remove connector P31 at IP

handling board
(5) Open cable holders
Figure 40
(6) Remove 4 nuts at drawer unit

(7) Remove drawer unit
Figure 41
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Put drawer unit in place
(2) Mount 4 nuts at drawer unit
(3) Put cable into place
(4) Mount connector P31 at IP handling board
(5) Close cable holders
(6) Perform a "Drawer Unit Height" adjustment. Refer to chapter 3.6,
adjustments
(7) Mount Erasure unit. See section 2.8.
(8) Mount IP guide plate


Repair and Service

Result: The drawer unit is replaced.
2.8 Replacing the Erasure Unit

CM+9 5175 3600 X
Figure 42
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove screw
(3) Disconnect cables
(4) Take out erasure unit
Figure 43
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount in reverse order.

Result: The erasure unit is replaced.
2.9 Replacing the Input Rollers

CM+9 5175 9030 X
Figure 44


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
Spare part CM+9 5175 9030 X
2
contains all 4 input rollers. It is
recommended to replace always all 1
4 rollers together.
The segmented roller always has to
be mounted at position 4.
4
3
Figure 45
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
Small size
REQUIRED TIME:
90 min
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove erasure unit.
See section 2.8
See section 2.4
(4) Remove 4 C-clips at transport
unit right hand side
Figure 46


Repair and Service
(5) Remove 2 screws inside

cassette unit
Figure 47
(6) Remove 4 C-clips at transport

unit right hand side
(7) Remove rollers
Figure 48


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The input rollers are replaced.


Repair and Service
2.10 Replacing the IP Handling Board

CM+9 5175 5230 X
Figure 49
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
45 min
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Disconnect all cables at the IP
handling board, except P28
(cable to user interface)
(3) Open the 6 mounting clips
(4) Remove the IP handling board
Figure 50


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The IP Handling Board is replaced.
2.11 Replacing the Permanent Magnets

CM+9 5175 6125 X
Figure 51
IMPORTANT:
Spare part CM+9 5175 6125 X contains all 3 permanent magnets.
It is recommended to replace all 3 magnets together.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm Medium size


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove erasure unit. A
See section 2.8
(3) Remove IP guide plate B
Figure 52
CAUTION:
(4) Remove screws at magnet

(5) Remove magnets
517535ai.cdr
Figure 53


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The permanent magnets are replaced.
2.12 Replacing the Roller IP Sensor

CM+9 9499 6950 X
Figure 54
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
15 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Pull out the cassette unit
B
A
A
Figure 55
(2) Disconnect the cable

(3) Remove the roller IP sensor
Figure 56
ASSEMBLY:


Repair and Service

Result: The roller IP sensor is replaced.
2.13 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Roller Clamping

CM+9 5175 9050 X
Figure 57
IMPORTANT:
Spare part CM+9 5175 9050 X contains all replaceable belts for the digitizer.
It is not required to replace all toothed belts together.
Only replace the defective toothed belt.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
Small size
REQUIRED TIME:
45 min
CAUTION:


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
See section 2.8.
(3) Push drawer unit 1 to 2 cm to B
the front (A)
and lift it out. (B)
Figure 58
(5) Open screws at adapter plate
Figure 59
(6) Open C-clip at roller

(7) Remove toothed belt
Figure 60


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The toothed belt Stepper Motor Roller Clamping is replaced.
2.14 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Drawer

CM+9 5175 9050 X
Figure 61
IMPORTANT:
Spare part CM++9 5175 9050 X contains all belts for the digitizer.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
Small size


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min
CAUTION:
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove Erasure unit.
See section 2.8.
(3) Remove drawer unit. 517535aj.cdr
See section 2.7

Figure 62
(4) Remove the toothed belt.
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Drawer is replaced.


Repair and Service
2.15 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Roller

CM++9 5175 9050 X
Figure 63
IMPORTANT:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
Small size
REQUIRED TIME:
5 min
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove 3 screws of stepper
motor roller
(3) Remove motor
(4) Remove belt
Figure 64
ASSEMBLY:


Repair and Service

Result: The Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Roller is replaced.
2.16 Replacing the Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Opener

CM++9 5175 9050 X
Figure 65
IMPORTANT:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
Small size
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove toothed belt
Figure 66
ASSEMBLY:
(1) Mount toothed belt

(2) Wait till the green light at the user interface lights up (takes approx. 1
min.)
Result: The Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Opener is replaced.


Repair and Service
2.17 Replacing the User Interface Board

CM+9 5175 1580 X
Figure 67
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm Medium size
REQUIRED TIME:
5 min
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.1
(2) Remove four screws. See
Figure 67.
(3) Remove the user interface
board
Figure 68
ASSEMBLY:


Repair and Service

Result: The user interface board is replaced.


Repair and Service
3 Replacements at Scan Module
3.1 Replacing the Antistatic Brush Scan Module Entry

CM+9 5175 2310 X
Figure 69
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm 5 mm,
5 mm 6 mm
Small size 2 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
90 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Open cassette unit
(2) Remove top cover.
See section 1.5
(3) Remove optic module.
See section 3.3.
(4) Remove PMT with light Figure 70
collector.
See section 3.6
(5) Remove 3 screws.
See Figure 70
(6) Remove antistatic brush
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The Antistatic Brush Scan Module Entry is replaced.


Repair and Service
3.2 Replacing the Calibration Board

CM+9 5175 2470 X
Figure 71
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm 5 mm,
5 mm 6 mm
Small size 2 mm
5,5 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
90 min


Repair and Service
The replacement of the Calibration Board is divided in following steps.
# Description Details see....

1 Removal of top, left and right cover 3.2.1
2 Removal of PMI board carrier with PMT 3.2.2
3 Removal of optic module 3.2.3
4 Removal of slow scan module carrier 0
5 Removal of light collector 3.2.5
6 Removal of slow scan module 3.2.6
7 Removal of calibration board 3.2.7
3.2.1 Removal of top, left and right Cover
DISASSEMBLY:
(1) Disconnect all cables
(3) Remove top cover. B
See section 1.5
See section 1.2
See section 1.4
A
517535aa.cdr
Figure 72


Repair and Service
3.2.2 Removal of PMI board carrier with PMT
CAUTION:
Do not press on the light collector when the PMI board carrier with PMT is
removed.
(1) Disconnect cable at PMI power

distribution board
Figure 73
(2) Disconnect all cables at PMI

board
Figure 74
(3) Disconnect cable at optic

module
Figure 75


Repair and Service
(4) Remove 2 screws of the PMI

board carrier at left hand side
Figure 76

board carrier at right hand side
Figure 77
(6) Disconnect cable at PMT

(7) Remove 1 screw at PMT right
hand side
Figure 78


Repair and Service
(8) Remove 1 screw at PMT left

hand side
(9) Take off PMI board carrier with
PMT
Figure 79
3.2.3 Removal of Optic Module
(1) Remove 4 screws at optic

module
(2) Take off optic module
Figure 80


Repair and Service
3.2.4 Removal of Slow Scan Module carrier
CAUTION:
The slow scan module can fall down if the screws of the slow scan
module carrier are removed.
Put a piece of carton or a big piece of cloth below the scan module before
you loosen the screws at the slow scan module carrier..
(1) Put a piece of carton or a big

piece of cloth below the scan
module
(2) Remove screws of slow scan
module carrier left side.
Figure 81

module carrier right side.
(4) Take off slow scan module
carrier
Figure 82


Repair and Service
3.2.5 Removal of Light Collector
(1) Remove dust cover
Figure 83
(2) Open 4 screws at holder for

light collector
(3) Remove light collector
Figure 84


Repair and Service
3.2.6 Removal of Slow Scan Module
(1) Remove rear film guide
Figure 85
(2) Remove 2 connectors at

distribution board
Figure 86
(3) Take of slow scan module

(4) Put it on a table 1
Figure 87


Repair and Service
3.2.7 Removal of Calibration Board
(1) Remove 4 screws

(2) Remove calibration board
Figure 88
3.2.8 Assembly of the Digitizer after Removal of the Calibration Board
ASSEMBLY:
CALIBRATION:
(1) Perform a scan line calibration. Refer to chapter 3.6, Adjustments.
Verification: The verification of the repair is done during scan line calibration.
Result: The Calibration Board is replaced.


Repair and Service
3.3 Replacing the Optic Module

CM+9 5175 2750 X
Figure 89
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm 5 mm,
5 mm 6 mm
Small size 2 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.5 B
517535aa.cdr
Figure 90
(3) Disconnect cable at PMI power

distribution board
Figure 91
(4) Disconnect cables at PMI

board
Figure 92


Repair and Service
(5) Disconnect cable at optic

module
Figure 93

board carrier at left hand side
Figure 94

board carrier at right hand side
Figure 95


Repair and Service
(8) Disconnect cable at PMT

(9) Remove 1 screw at PMT right
hand side
Figure 96
(10) Remove 1 screw at PMT left

hand side
(11) Take off PMI board carrier with
PMT
Figure 97
(12) Remove 4 screws at optic

module
(13) Take off optic module
Figure 98
CAUTION:
Carefully mount the PMI board carrier with PMT.
ASSEMBLY:


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
Before you fasten the 5 screws of the
PMI board carrier, shift the PMI
board carrier towards the digitizer
rear side.
This ensures that the PMI board
carrier is mounted on the same
position again, where the light
collector is in a stress free position.
Figure 99
CALIBRATION:
Result: The optic module is replaced.


Repair and Service
3.4 Replacing the PMI Power Distribution Board

CM+9 5170 4980 X
Figure 100
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Antistatic wrist strap

3 mm
5,5 mm (magnetic)
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min
DISASSEMBLY:
B
A
A
Figure 101


Repair and Service

See section 1.5
(2) Disconnect cable at the PMI
Power distribution board
(3) Open the 5 mounting screws
(4) Remove the PMI Power
distribution board
5175R3-3_103
Figure 102
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The PMI Power Distribution Board is replaced.


Repair and Service
3.5 Replacing the PMI Board

CM+9 5175 9020 X
Figure 103
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm 2,5 mm

5 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min
DISASSEMBLY:
517535aa.cdr
Figure 104


Repair and Service

See section 1.5
(3) Disconnect all cables at the
PMI board
(4) Remove the PMI cover
(5) Remove all screws of the PMI
board
(6) Remove the PMI board
Figure 105
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The PMI Board is replaced.


Repair and Service
3.6 Replacing the PMT with Light Collector

CM+9 5175 9010 X
Figure 106
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm 5 mm,
5 mm 6 mm
Small size 10 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
90 min


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
517535aa.cdr
Figure 107
CAUTION:
The PMT light sensitivity decreases for a certain time (hours to days) if
exposed to bright light.
Expose the light sensitive side of the PMT as little as possible to daylight.
CAUTION:

See section 1.5
(3) Remove optic module.
See section 3.3.
(4) Put a piece of carton or a big
piece of cloth below the scan
module
module carrier left side.
Figure 108


Repair and Service

module carrier right side.
Figure 109
(7) Remove dust cover
Figure 110
CAUTION:
Handle the light collector with great care.
(8) Open 4 screws at holder for

light collector
(9) Remove light collector
Figure 111


Repair and Service
(10) Remove PMT
Figure 112
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Perform PMI board carrier position adjustment for the light collector.
Refer to section 3.6, adjustments.
(3) Remove PMI board carrier
(4) Mount PMT at PMI board
(5) Mount optic module. See section 3.3.
(6) Mount top cover. See section 1.5
(7) Close cassette unit
CALIBRATION:
Result: The PMT with Light collector is successfully replaced.


Repair and Service
3.7 Replacing the Scan Rollers

CM+9 5175 2650 X
Figure 113
IMPORTANT:
Spare part CM+9 5175 2650 Xcontains both upper scan rollers. It is
recommended to replace both scan rollers together.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
5 mm 3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
45 min
DISASSEMBLY:
(2) Remove rear cover. See 1.3
B
517535aa.cdr
Figure 114


Repair and Service
(3) Remove safety bracket at front

scan roller
(4) Remove front scan roller
Figure 115
(5) Remove safety bracket at rear

scan roller
(6) Remove rear scan roller
Figure 116
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The scan rollers are replaced.


Repair and Service
3.8 Replacing the Slow Scan Board

CM+9 5175 2120 X
Figure 117
REQUIRED TOOLS:

3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
45 min
DISASSEMBLY:
B
A
A
Figure 118


Repair and Service

See section 1.5
(3) Disconnect all cables at the
slow scan board
(4) Open the 4 mounting clips
(5) Remove the slow scan board
Figure 119
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The slow scan board is replaced.


Repair and Service
3.9 Replacing the Slow Scan Unit

CM+9 5175 2400 X
Figure 120
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm 5 mm,
5 mm 6 mm
Small size 10 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
90 min
CAUTION:
The PMT light sensitivity decreases if exposed to bright light.
Expose the light sensitive side of the PMT as little as possible to daylight.
CAUTION:


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
The E-Label on the slow scan board which is mounted on the spare slow
scan module contains parameters for the slow scan motor.
Replace the slow scan module together with the slow scan board.
DISASSEMBLY:
(2) Remove PMT with light collector
(3) Lift out slow scan module B
517535aa.cdr
Figure 121
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The slow scan unit is replaced.


Repair and Service
4 Replacements at Mounting Rack
4.1 Replacing the Cassette Unit open Safety Switch

CM+9 0426 6304 0
Figure 122
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
5 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min
DISASSEMBLY:
B
A
A
Figure 123


Repair and Service

See section 1.5
See section 1.2.
(4) Remove 2 screws at safety
switch left and right hand side
(5) Remove safety switch
(6) Remove cables at safety switch
Figure 124
ASSEMBLY:
(2) Check the cassette unit open safety switch. Refer to section 3.6,
adjustments.
Verification: The verification of the repair is done during the check of the cassette unit
open safety switch.
Result: The Cassette Unit open Safety Switch is replaced.


Repair and Service
4.2 Replacing the Distributor Board

CM+9 5175 1560 0
Figure 125
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min
DISASSEMBLY:
(2) Remove rear cover. See 1.3
B
A
A
Figure 126


Repair and Service
(3) Disconnect cables at Distributor

board
(4) Remove distributor board
Figure 127
ASSEMBLY:

Result: The Distributor Board is replaced.


Repair and Service
4.3 Replacing the Power Supply

CM+9 5175 1420 X
Figure 128
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm Medium size
5 mm
2,5 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min
DANGER:
If the power cord is connected and the main switch is switched on the
input side of the power supply is connected to high voltage. Risk of
live.
Remove all cables in the rear of the digitizer before removal of the rear
cover


Repair and Service
DISASSEMBLY:
See section 1.4
(3) Remove rear cover.
See section 1.3
B
A
A
Figure 129
(4) Remove 2 rear screws (Figure

130 only shows the left screw)
Figure 130
(5) Unscrew all connectors at output

side of power supply
Figure 131


Repair and Service
(6) Open screws at input side of

power supply
(7) Remove power supply
Figure 132
DANGER:
If the cables at the input side of
the power supply are mounted
wrong, the housing of the digitizer
can be connected to high voltage.
Risk of live.
Mount the cables at the power supply
as indicated on the cables and shown
in Figure 133.
Figure 133


Repair and Service
ASSEMBLY:

(7) Continue with the Basic Protective Earth Test and Electrical Check
according to National Regulations
4.3.1 Basic Protective Earth Test

(1) Use a multimeter that is
capable to measure a
resistance < 1 Ohm
connector of the mains input
200
(3) Put the other probe at a few
could touch. 517511ai.cdr
The electrical resistance has to
be ≤ 0.2 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 134.
Figure 134


Repair and Service
(4) Insert the power cord at the

printer side; leave it
disconnected at the wall side.
connector of the mains
connector.
(6) Put the other probe at a few 517509ah.cdr

could touch.
The electrical resistance in this
case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 135. Figure 135
IMPORTANT:
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2
Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the printer for
loose grounding connections!
4.3.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations
(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.

Example for Germany: BGV A3 and DIN VDE 0751 or subsequent
regulations.
Result: The power supply is replaced.


Chapter 3.6
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Adjustments and Calibrations
DIGITIZERS
Type 5175 / 100/110

This document describes all adjustments and calibrations as well as their purpose

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1:
1.2 10-2007 • Added shading calibration for FLFS cassettes.
See section 3.1.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v04
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.06E Adjustments and Calibrations
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 3.6 / 2

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW OF ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATIONS.........................................................4

2 ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................................5
2.1 Drawer Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................5
2.1.1 Checking the vertical Distance..................................................................................................6
2.2 Checking the horizontal Distance .............................................................................................9
2.2.1 Mechanical Adjustment...........................................................................................................10
2.3 PMI Board Carrier Position Adjustment ..................................................................................11
2.3.1 Cassette Unit Safety Switch Position Adjustment...................................................................14
2.3.2 Checking the Switch Position..................................................................................................14
2.3.3 Adjusting the Switch Position..................................................................................................15
2.4 Cassette Edge Sensor Position Adjustment ...........................................................................16
3 CALIBRATIONS .....................................................................................................................18
3.1 Performing a Shading Calibration ...........................................................................................18
3.1.1 Verifying a successful Shading Calibration.............................................................................22
3.1.2 Possible Reasons for Failing a Shading Calibration...............................................................23
3.2 Stall Calibration .......................................................................................................................24


Repair and Service
1 Overview of Adjustments and Calibrations
Adjustment To be done in case .... Details see....

Drawer Unit Adjustment After replacement of the 2.1
drawer unit
PMI board carrier position After replacement of the PMT with 2.3
adjustment light collector
Cassette unit open safety After replacement of cassette unit 2.3.1
switch position adjustment safety switch
Cassette edge sensor After replacement of cassette edge 2.4
position adjustment sensor
Calibration To be done in case .... Details see....

Shading calibration • After replacement of the PMT 3.1
with light collector
• After replacement of the optic
module
• Whenever the PMT or light
collector have been removed
(e.g. for replacing the slow
scan module)
• Whenever stripes in slow scan
position are visible, which
cannot be removed by cleaning
of the scan line with the
cleaning brush
Stall Calibration • After replacement of a motor or 3.2
mechanical assembly where a
motor with stall detection is
built in.
• After replacement of the IP
handling board (as this has the
motor controllers built in).


Repair and Service
2 Adjustments
2.1 Drawer Unit Adjustment
PURPOSE Adjustment of the optimum horizontal and vertical position of the upper drawer unit
plate for reliable IP transport in and out of the cassette.
TO BE • After replacement of the drawer unit

PERFORMED
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm Drawer adjustment tool

CM+9.5175.6001.0
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min
The drawer unit adjustment is split up in three parts:
Drawer unit adjustment part Details see....

1 Checking the vertical Distance 2.1.1
2 Checking the horizontal Distance 2.2
3 If required: Mechanical Adjustment 2.2.1


Repair and Service
2.1.1 Checking the vertical Distance
CAUTION:
Less reliable IP run possible if IP guide plate is deformed.
(1) Remove the front cover.

See chapter 3.5
(2) Remove the erasure unit.
See chapter 3.5
and lift it out.
Figure 1
(4) Pull at the toothed belt to open

the cassette opener
517536ak.cdr
Figure 2
CAUTION:
Misalignment of drawer unit possible when pushing it at the upper plate.
When pushing the drawer unit only do this via drawer unit axle.


Repair and Service
(5) Check clearance of the upper plate: If clearance is available, push the upper
plate up. See important note below.
(6) Push drawer unit at the axle completely to the front. See Figure 3.
Figure 3
IMPORTANT:
Drawer upper plate
At some drawer units the upper plate has a +/- 1 mm
clearance of up to ± 1 mm, if you pull it up or
push it down at the front part where the
Drawer
magnets are mounted. This may be present mounting plate
despite the vertical fixation screws are
fastened.
Proceeding:
Before checking the vertical distance push
the upper plate gently up.
517536aj.cdr
Figure 4


Repair and Service
Drawer unit (Upper plate)
2 mm gauge
2 mm Cassette entry
517536am.cdr
517536aa.cdr
Figure 5 Figure 6
(7) Insert the drawer unit adjustment

tool in the cassette unit entry
(8) With the 2 mm gauge of the drawer
adjustment tool check the vertical
distance at the left and right hand
side
Figure 7
517536an.cdr
Check vertical Check vertical

distance left 2 mm gauge distance right
Figure 8


Repair and Service
EVALUATION In case the distance is 2 mm on both sides there is no vertical adjustment required.
Otherwise perform mechanical adjustment as described section 2.2.1.
2.2 Checking the horizontal Distance

(1) Insert the drawer unit adjustment tool in Plastic finger at
the cassette unit entry drawer unit
(Upper plate)
(2) Push it completely to the right
(3) Check, whether plastic finger at drawer Drawer
unit is aligned with the horizontal stop of adjustment tool
the drawer adjustment tool. See Figure
9 and Figure 10.
Cassette entry
517536ag.cdr
Figure 9
Horizontal stop
517536ah.cdr !
Drawer adjustment tool
Figure 10
EVALUATION In case the horizontal stop is aligned with the plastic finger at the drawer unit there is
no adjustment required.
Otherwise perform mechanical adjustment as described section 2.2.1.


Repair and Service
2.2.1 Mechanical Adjustment
Vertical Adjustment:
(1) Open the vertical fixation screws (1) one to two turns
(2) Adjust the vertical distance with the vertical adjustment screws (1')
(3) Check the adjustment with the drawer unit adjustment tool at the hand and left
hand side. See section 2.1.1
(4) Fasten the vertical fixation screws (1)
Horizontal adjustment:
(1) Open the horizontal fixation screws (2)
(2) Adjust the horizontal distance. See section 2.2
(3) Fasten the horizontal fixation screws (2)
(4) Mount IP guide plate, erasure unit and front cover.
2
1'
1 2
1
1'
1 Fixation vertical
1' Adjustment screws vertical
2 Fixation horizontal 517536ab.cdr
Figure 11

(3) Scan one image plate with each cassette format the customer is using.
Result: The drawer unit adjustment is performed.


Repair and Service
2.3 PMI Board Carrier Position Adjustment
PURPOSE Adjust the position of the light collector this way that it is stress-free mounted.
Miss-alignment can lead to IP jams, laser reflections or cracks in the light collector.
TO BE • After replacement of the PMT with light collector

PERFORMED
REQUIRED TOOLS:
13 mm 6 mm
PMT gauge
(Part of delivery)
REQUIRED TIME:
30 min
(1) Mount the PMT gauge on the light
collector
(2) Confirm that the PMI board carrier at
the 5 mounting screws is shifted as
far as possible to the rear.
Figure 12


Repair and Service
(3) Adjust the PMI board carrier this

way, that the PMI board just touches
the PMT gauge.
Adjust horizontal position as well as

the angle of the PMI board carrier.
Figure 13
(4) Measure the distance between

frame and PMI board carrier:
This distance is checked again after
mounting of the PMT.
Figure 14
(5) Remove the PMT gauge

(6) Mount the PMT at the PMI board carrier
(7) Mount the PMI board carrier with PMT. See important note next page.
(8) Mount the PMT with PMI board carrier at the light collector
(9) Check the distance between PMI board carrier and frame: It should still have
the same distance than measured under step (4)
(10) Continue with assembly of the digitizer


Repair and Service
IMPORTANT:
Before you fasten the 5 screws of the PMI
board carrier, shift the PMI board carrier
towards the digitizer rear side.
This ensures that the PMI board carrier is
mounted on the same position again, where
the light collector is in a stress free position.
Figure 15

(6) Reject the image
Result: The PMI board carrier is adjusted this way, that the light collector is mounted
stress free.


Repair and Service
2.3.1 Cassette Unit Safety Switch Position Adjustment
PURPOSE Adjustment of the switch-off position: The safety switch has to be adjusted this way that
it switches off the machine if the cassette unit is opened
approx. 1 cm.
TO BE • After replacement of the cassette unit safety switch

PERFORMED
REQUIRED TOOLS:
3 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
20 min
2.3.2 Checking the Switch Position

(1) Close the cassette unit
(2) Switch the digitizer on
(3) Check: With closed cassette the switch may not interrupt the power
(4) Open the cassette unit approx. 1 cm
(5) Check: With cassette unit opened approx. 1 cm, the switch must switch off the
digitizer.
If it does not switch off, continue with section 2.3.3


Repair and Service
2.3.3 Adjusting the Switch Position

(1) Remove the top cover. See chapter
3.5, Replacements.
(2) Remove the left cover. See chapter
3.5, Replacements.
(3) Open the adjustment screws. See
Figure 16
(4) Shift it to the front (switch does not
close with inserted cassette unit) or
to the rear (switch switches too late
when cassette unit is opened) Figure 16
(5) Repeat the check as described in
section. 2.3.2

(2) Open the cassette unit approx. 1 cm
(3) Confirm that the switch opens and switches off the digitizer
(4) Close the cassette unit.
(5) Wait till the green LED lights up
Result: The cassette unit safety switch is adjusted


Repair and Service
2.4 Cassette Edge Sensor Position Adjustment
PURPOSE Adjustment of the switch position, so that it reliably detects whether the cassette is
inserted the right way.
TO BE • After replacement of the cassette edge sensor

PERFORMED
REQUIRED TOOLS:
1,5 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
20 min
(1) Insert a cassette the right way, i.e. black
side to the top and the shutter inside the
digitizer
(2) Push the cassette to the right: The
cassette edge sensor has to switch - a
"click" must be audible
If the sensor does not switch, open the

screws at the cassette edge sensor and
push it more to the left. Repeat step (1)
Figure 17


Repair and Service
(3) Insert a cassette the wrong way.

(4) Push the cassette to the right:
The cassette edge sensor may not switch
- no "click" may be audible.
If the sensor switches, open the screws at

the cassette edge sensor and push it
more to the right. Repeat step (3)
(5) Check again the position of the cassette
edge sensor with proper inserted
cassette.
See step (1).
Figure 18

(3) Insert a cassette the wrong way: The digitizer may not recognize the cassette
(4) Insert the cassette the right way: The digitizer has to recognize the cassette.
Result: The cassette edge sensor is adjusted


Repair and Service
3 Calibrations
3.1 Performing a Shading Calibration
PURPOSE Determine the sensitivity of the scanning system for each pixel of the scan line
TO BE • After replacement of the PMT (Photomultiplier) with light collector

PERFORMED
• After replacement of the optic module
• Whenever the PMT or light collector have been removed (e.g. for replacing the slow
scan module)
• Whenever stripes in slow scan position are visible, which cannot be removed by
cleaning of the scan line with the cleaning brush
WHAT A flatfield is scanned. For each pixel a sensitivity factor is stored in an EEPROM
HAPPENS on the PMT.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
1,5 mm Copper Filter
REQUIRED TIME:
60 min


Repair and Service
REQUIRED CASSETTE:
• Use the largest available cassette.
• If Genrad and FLFS cassettes of size 35x43 cm are available, use a Genrad
cassette.
• If no Genrad cassette in size 35x43 cm is available, however a FLFS cassette
(FLFs cassettes are only available in size 35x43 cm), use the FLFS cassette.
Observe special procedure described in step (4) and Figure 21.
Example 1:
The customer uses 3 x FLFS cassettes 35x43 cm, plus 3 x Genrad cassettes 24x30 cm
→ use the 35x43 FLFS cassette
Example 2:
The customer uses 2 x Genrad cassettes 35x43 cm plus 3 x FLFS cassettes 35x43 cm
→ use the 35x43 Genrad cassette
Backscatter
FLFS
Protection
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 19
(1) Select the largest available cassette. If possible, use a Genrad cassette. See
above.
(2) Open the cassette and check the image plate (IP) for scratches. If no scratches
are visible, select this IP.
(3) Erase the IP
(4) If you use a FLFS cassette for shading calibration, put 2 cassettes underneath
the FLFS cassettes: This covers the area where the cassette has no backscatter
protection. Only this area has to be covered, which is used by the digitizer to
determine the shading calibration curves. See Figure 21 next page.


Repair and Service
(5) Expose this IP with a dose of 2 x 10 μGy Rotating X-Ray tube

Anode
= 20 μGy: Cathode
Take two exposures of 10 µGy (12.0 mAs

- 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with 1.5 mm Cu
filter) turned by 180°. See NOTE below.
For exposure place the cassette in length
direction to the X-ray tube, 517509aa.cdr
see Figure 20.

Figure 20
Exposure 1 Exposure 2
FLFS cassette
shading calibration
Area used by
Area used by
shading calibration
517536fa.cdr
Put a cassette underneath this area.

This prevents, that the missing
backscatter protection falsifies the
shading calibration result.
Figure 21
NOTE:
The parameters "12.0 mAs - 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with 1.5 mm Cu filter" are
approximate values that may vary within the X-ray devices to reach the specified dose of
10µGy.
In addition it is not essential to expose exactly with the dose of 2 x 10 µG. The allowed
range is between 8 and 50 µG.
(6) Start the CR 30-X Service Client: Select Start - Programs - Agfa CR 30-X -
Service Client
(7) Select "Preventive Maintenance - Calibration":
The current shading calibration is displayed. See Figure 22
(8) Select "Calibrate"
(9) Insert the exposed cassette: The IP is scanned and erased.


Repair and Service
(10) Wait until the calibration data is transferred. In case of an error refer to section
3.1.2 Possible Reasons for Failing a Shading Calibration.
(11) Check, if the calibration file is stored in the Control PC.
See note next page.
(12) Remove cassette from digitizer
(13) If you made the shading calibration with a FLFS cassette: Erase the two
cassettes which where put underneath the FLFS cassette during exposure.
Figure 22
NOTE:
• The digitizer records 6 shading calibration lines (Gain 1 to Gain 6), one for
each facet of the polygon mirror.
• Additionally to the storage on the PMT, the calibration file is stored in the
following folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Agfa\CR30-X\Gains00.stc
The calibration file is overwritten by the new one. To keep a certain
calibration file, save it with a different name.


Repair and Service
3.1.1 Verifying a successful Shading Calibration

Verification: (1) Expose a flatfield
(2) Let it scan by the digitizer
(3) Print or archive the image
(4) Check the image for homogeneity in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Evaluation:
• If the scanned image does not show stripes in slow scan direction the
shading calibration is okay.
• If there are unacceptable effects in slow scan or fast scan direction see
chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT:
If you use a FLFS cassette for flatfield exposure, the image will be slightly darker in
the upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed (approx.
1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image quality evaluation in
slow scan and fast scan direction to verify a successful shading calibration.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Figure 23


Repair and Service
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always the long side of the scanned area.
43 cm 24 cm
18 cm
Slow scan
direction 35 cm
30 cm
24 cm
30 cm
15 cm 517509ab.cdr
Result: The shading calibration is executed.
3.1.2 Possible Reasons for Failing a Shading Calibration
There are mainly following reasons for a failed calibration:
• Dirt or dust in the optical path.

• Cassette wrong exposed (too high / low dose).
• Cassette was not exposed on its full surface (collimation)
• PMT was exposed to direct sunlight before calibration (in this case PMT has
lower sensitivity).
• PMI board carrier (with mounted PMT) misaligned.


Repair and Service
3.2 Stall Calibration
PURPOSE Determination of the optimum motor current for stall detection.

Compensates the differences (e.g. friction; motor controller) of an assembly in series
production.
NOTE:
If the stall detection would not be performed, this could lead in the long term to a false
stall detection and related "false" IP jam error messages.
TO BE • After replacement of a motor or mechanical assembly where a motor with stall
PERFORMED detection is built in.
• After replacement of the IP handling board (as this has the motor controllers built
in).
Parts exchange and related stall calibration:
Roller Clamping
Locking
Opener
Drawer
Exchange of ..... Fixer
Drawer Motor M4 as part of drawer unit

(CM+9 5175 6100 X)
Toothed belt stepper motor drawer
(Part of kit CM+9 5175 9050 X)
Fixer Motor M1 as part of Cassette Fixation Unit (CM+9
5175 9040 X)
Opener Motor M3 as part of Cassette Opener
(CM+9 5175 5200 X)
Toothed Belt Stepper Motor Opener
Locking Motor M17 as part of Cassette Locking Unit
(CM+9 5175 5600 X)
Toothed belt stepper motor roller clamping
Roller Set of Transport Unit (CM+9 5175 9030 X)
IP handling board


Repair and Service
WHAT The motor drives several times to its home and end position with different motor
HAPPENS currents. The mean value of these different motor currents is used as motor control
current, where the steps of the motor are in the specified, allowed range.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
CR 30-X service client on processing station
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 1 min. per stall calibration
HOW TO BE (1) Start the CR 30-X Service Client

PERFORMED (2) Enter username and password
(3) Select "Preventive Maintenance - Stall Calibration"
(4) Select the required stall calibration (see table previous page)
(5) Wait till the stall calibration is finished: Takes approx. 1 minute
(6) For software < CRE_13XX: Switch off/on the digitizer
RESULT The stall calibration is successfully performed
Figure 25
NOTE:
The stall calibration does not harm - it can be performed anytime. It is required
however only in the cases as described previous page.


DD+DIS150.06E Software Menus, Settings
Chapter 3.7
Chapter 3.7, Software Menus, Settings is intentionally left blank.
The digitizer CR30-X does not have device specific settings which may be
altered by the service engineer.
All settings are either determined in production and stored in E-Lables in the
corresponding module, or - at replacement of parts - have to be determined
again by an adjustment routine. These new values are automatically written to
the corresponding E-Label.

eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v01

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.06E Software Releases and Patches
Chapter 3.8
List of Contents
1 Release Info for Software CRE_1010A............................... 1

1.1 Supported Functions.............................................................................1
1.2 Limitations..............................................................................................1
Document Node ID:12152365

eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v01


5175/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.06E Software Releases and Patches
1 Release Info for Software CRE_1010A
Type of new Software 1st customer release
Release Date 09/2006
Digitizer SNs ≥ 1001
Availability MEDNET, GSO Library* (8 MB size)
Prerequisites None
• *Note:
• On MEDNET always the latest free available release can be
downloaded.
• A software patch for a certain basic release always contains all previous
software patches for this release.
1.1 Supported Functions

• All functions as specified in the Design Input Requirements i.e.
− Open the inserted cassette (15 x 30 cm; 18 x 24 cm; 24 x 30 cm; 35 x
43 cm) and transport the IP to the Scan Unit.
− Acquire the ID data via fast ID mode from the processing station.
− Scan (= stimulate and scan) the image on the IP.
− Send the raw image to the processing station
− Erase the IP.
− Put the IP back in its cassette, close cassette
− Update ID data on IP (cycle counter).
1.2 Limitations
• Shading calibration curves are stored at the processing station only.
This means, if a digitizer is operated with another processing station
without restore, its shading calibration is lost

DD+DIS150.06E FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
Chapter 3.9
List of Contents
1 Options and Configurations........................................................1
2 Installation ....................................................................................2
3 Operation ......................................................................................3
4 User and Service Manuals...........................................................4
5 Calibration.....................................................................................4

eq_03-9_faq_e_template_v01

1 Options and Configurations
Digitizer as stand-alone Is it possible to operate the CR30-X digitizer stand-alone?

device? No, the CR30-X always needs a dedicated NX workstation for operation.
The digitizer has an own Agfa order number (so-called ABC code), it makes
? no sense however to order a CR30-X only. It is always part of a "CR Entry
System", consisting of
- CR30-X
- NX Workstation
- Cassettes type 'MD 4.0T' with IPs 'MD40'
Cassettes and image Can the CR30-X MD 4.0T cassettes with IPs MD40 be used in other
plates compatible to other Agfa digitizers?
digitizers?
• The cassettes MD 4.0T can only be used in the CR30-X digitizer. They
contain a special, thin tray for transport of the image plate in and out of
? the cassette. The 'T' in the name of the MD 4.0T cassettes stands for
this tray.
• The image plates MD40 could also be used in CR 25.0, CR 75.0 and
CR 85.0.
Options for the digitizer? Which options are available for the CR30-X digitizer?
• Fixation Kit (Some mechanical parts to fix the digitizer at the wall)
? • Cassettes with IPs (35x43; 15x30; 24x30; 18x24)
• UPS
• Table with wheels.
Options for the CR30-X Which options are available for the CR30-X System?
system?
• Auto QC2 (Dedicated PC with Auto QC2 software and box with tools like
phantom etc. Status 09/2006: Still waiting for release)
? • Printer (Drystar 5302)
CR30-X "All in One"? Will a "CR30-X All in One" version be offered, similar like the "DX-S All
in One"?
? Currently it is not planned to have an "All in One" version (i.e. CR30-X with
NX and UPS in one cart).

FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions DD+DIS150.06E
Processing station with Is it possible use the CR30-X processing station also for other
several digitizer inputs? digitizers, e.g. CR85.0?
No, this is not foreseen. One NX processing station may only communicate
? to one digitizer.
2 Installation
Staging of the digitizer? Will the CR30-X digitizer and the processing station be staged
together?
? No, there will be no common staging procedure, as this is not required: All
drivers and software for the CR30-X are loaded on the NX already.
Exception: In a certain case it could be possible, that a CR30-X digitizer is
delivered with newer digitizer software than the NX or vice verse. Such a
mismatch is automatically detected during installation, and a warning
message is issued which indicates, which part of the system has to be
upgraded.
Country specific delivery? Will the CR30-X be delivered country specific?

Not really: It will be delivered with a CD ROM with user manuals in 20
? languages, but only 2 cables (European version; US version). In case other
cables are required they have to be organized locally.
Calibrations and Which calibrations, adjustments and ATPs (Acceptance Test

adjustments during Procedures) have to be performed during installation?
installation? No calibration or adjustment is required during installation.
At the end of the installation a basic ATP is recommended: There a flatfield
? has to be exposed and evaluated at the viewing station or at the lightbox
(Check for stripes in slowscan and fastscan direction).
In addition the flatfield is compared with two test patterns "lowest acceptable
quality", one for slow scan direction, one for fast scan direction.

Customer installation Will the CR Entry System be customer installable?

possible? No, only Agfa trained service engineers and Agfa trained dealers will be
able to install and maintain the system.
?
3 Operation
Workflow for the How is the workflow for the customer when he is using a CR30-X?
customer? The Entry CR system works according to the so-called "Fast ID" workflow:
• The patient demographics are entered in the “New Exam” window or
? received from a RIS database and are shown in the “Worklist” window.
• The radiographer takes the X-Ray exposure of the patient
• The cassette is entered in the digitizer
• The patient is selected at the NX “Worklist” window: After pressing the
“ID” button the actual scan cycle starts (Digitizer can only start scanning
when the speed class is known, which is stored in the exam tree for this
patient --> Speed class influences PMT voltage)
• The scanned image appears in the NX: When the scan cycle is finished,
the radiographer takes the cassette for a new exposure.
N.B.: Due to this workflow, it does not really make sense to have the
digitizer far away from the NX (default FWI cable length: 4.5 m).

FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions DD+DIS150.06E
4 User and Service Manuals
Service and user Which documents for user and service will be available for the Entry
documents for the CR system?
digitizer? User manuals:
• CR30-X user manual
? • CR30-X System user manual
• CR30-X Plates and Cassettes User Manual
• NX user manual
• NX key user manual
• Service Manual:
• CR30-X Service Manual DD+DIS150.06E
• NX Service Manual DD+DIS408.05E
CR30-X User manual on Will the CR30-X user manual be available on the processing station as
processing station? PDF?
No, the CR30-X user manual will only be available on a separate CD.
?
5 Calibration
Shading calibration with Is it possible to make the shading calibration (= flatfield uniformity)
small cassettes? with a cassette < 35x43 cm?
Yes, it is possible to make the shading calibration with a cassette < 35x43
? cm. In case the cassette is smaller the shading calibration covers only the
used size and smaller.

DD+DIS150.06E Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams
List of Contents
1 Reference Diagrams ..................................................................1
1.1 Sensors and Switches ............................................................................... 1

1.2 Motors ......................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Printed Circuit Boards ............................................................................... 2
1.4 Connectors ................................................................................................. 2
Overview of Circuit Diagrams

General Schematics Sheet 1 to 9

eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v01


1 Reference Diagrams
1.1 Sensors and Switches
Name Refer to
Cassette Edge Sensor (S1) Figure 3, page 5
Cassette Unit open Safety Switch (S2) Figure 3, page 5
Main switch (S3) Figure 3, page 5
1.2 Motors
Name Refer to
Roller Clamping Stepper Motor (M6) Figure 2, page 4
Drawer Stepper Motor (M4) Figure 2, page 4
Fixer Stepper Motor (M1) Figure 2, page 4
Locking Stepper Motor (M17) Figure 2, page 4
Opener Stepper Motor (M3) Figure 2, page 4
Roller Stepper Motor (M5) Figure 2, page 4
Slow Scan Lift Stepper Motor (M8) Figure 2, page 4
Slow Scan Stepper Motor (M9) Figure 2, page 4


Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams DD+DIS150.06E
1.3 Printed Circuit Boards
Name Refer to
Power Supply Figure 3, page 5
IP Handling Board Figure 1, page 3
Chip Reader Figure 3, page 5
User Interface Figure 1, page 3
PMI Power Distribution Board Figure 1, page 3
PMI Board Figure 1, page 3
Roller IP Sensor Figure 3, page 5
Slow Scan Lift Position Sensor Figure 3, page 5
Distributor Board Figure 3, page 5
Calibration Board Figure 3, page 5
Slow Scan Board Figure 1, page 3
Erasure Unit Figure 3, page 5
Roller IP Sensor Figure 3, page 5
1.4 Connectors
Name Refer to
Interconnector XK3 Figure 3, page 5

Chapter 4 / 2 CR30-X Edition 1, Revison 0

PMI Board
PMI Power
Disribution Board
Slow-Scan Board
517504aa.cdr
IP Handling Board
User Interface
Figure 1


Reference and Overall Circuit Diagrams DD+DIS150.06E
Opener
Drawer
Stepper Motor
Stepper Motor
(M3)
(M4)
Fixer
Stepper Motor
(M1)
Slow Scan
Stepper Motor Locking
(M9) Stepper Motor
(M17)
Slow Scan Lift Roller Clamping

Stepper Motor Stepper Motor
(M8) Roller 517504ab.cdr
(M6)
Stepper Motor
(M5)
Figure 2
Chapter 4 / 4 CR30-X Edition 1, Revison 0
Cassette Unit open

Calibration Board Safety Switch (S2)
Distributor Board
Cassette Edge Sensor (S1)

Chip Reader Firewire Cable
Interconnector
XK3
Power Supply
Roller IP Sensor
514504ac.cdr
Main Switch (S3)
Slow-Scan
Lift Position
Sensor
Figure 3

2 General Circuit Diagrams
Overview of Circuit Diagrams
Designation See page ...

Frame Sheet 1 of 9
Cassette Unit Sheet 2 of 9
Scan Modul Sheet 3 of 9
Light Collector Sheet 4 of 9
Scanner Unit Sheet 5 of 9
Erasure Unit Sheet 6 of 9
Wire Harness 5175.8510 Sheet 7 of 9


A B C D E F
+24VDC_ PMI_POWER_DISTR:
-W924,-W925,-W926,-W927
RD,RD,RD,RD #13127
/Light_Collector.1A
-W932,-W933,-W934,-W935
+24VDC_CASSETTE_UNIT
RD,RD,RD,RD #13126
/Cassette_Unit.3A
-W940,-W941,-W942,-W943
+24VDC_SCANNER_UNIT
RD,RD,RD,RD #13128
/Scanner_Unit.2A
1 1
+24VDC_ERASURE_UNIT
-W948,-W949,-W950,-W951
RD,RD,RD,RD #13125
/ERASURE_UNIT.2A
-XK3
F7.0473.6056.0
-W924,-W925
-BU92 -BU93 -W932,-W933
1/1 1a 1d 1/1
2
Cassette Unit open RD,RD
-BU91 -BU94
RD,RD
2
Main-Switch Safety Switch -W926,-W927
RD,RD 1/1 1b 1e 1/1 -W934,-W935
RD,RD
-S3 -BU90 -BU95
110-240VAC 50/60Hz
F8.5175.8585.0A F8.5175.8580.0 -W961

1/1 1c 1f 1/1
RD
-BU139 -BU135 -3 -2 -BU73 -W940,-W941
-BU96 -BU99 -W948,-W949
1 3 -W967 1/1 ACL +24VDC 1/1 -W963 -BU69 7 8 RD,RD 1/1 2a 2d 1/1 RD,RD
1/1 1/1 BK RD 1/1 1/1
-BU140 -BU136 F7.0475.9990.0 F7.0473.6252.0
-W964 -W962
-BU97 -BU100 -W950,-W951
1/1 2 4 1/1 -W968
BU -4 Power Supply -6 RD 1/1 3 4 1/1 RD 1/1 2b 2e 1/1 RD,RD
-W972
BK
1/1 ACN 24V DC / 12,5A +24VDC 1/1 -BU70 -S2 -BU71 -W942,-W943
-BU98 -BU101
F7.0475.9990.0 F7.0473.6252.0 RD,RD 1/1 2c 2f 1/1
-5 -1 F8.5175.8580.0 -BU102 -BU106 -W952,-W953
-BU138 -W970 PE GND 1/1 3a 3d 1/1 BK,BK
L L1 -W971 GNYE
1/1 F7.0486.1420.0 1/1
1/1 BU F7.0475.9990.0 F7.0473.6252.0 F8.5175.8580.0
-W965
-BU104 -BU107 -W954,-W955
-BU141 BK 1/1 3b 3e 1/1 BK,BK
N N1 1/1 -W972
BK
-7 -BU105 -BU108
-BU137 GND 1/1 -W944,-W945 3f -W936,-W937
BK,BK 1/1 3c 1/1 BK,BK
PE PE1 1/1 F7.0473.6252.0
-B420
F8.5175.8580.0
-W966
-BU103 -BU109 -W938,-W939
BK 1/1 4a 4d 1/1 BK,BK
C101837
F7.0460.9064.0 -BU110
-W928,-W929
-BU112 -W946,-W947
BK,BK 1/1 4b 4e 1/1 BK,BK
-BU111
-W930,-W931
BK,BK 1/1 4c 4f
3 -PE 3
1/1 -W946,-W947
F7.0471.3217.0 BK,BK
#13125
GND_ERASURE_UNIT
/ERASURE_UNIT.2A
#13126
GND_CASSETTE_UNIT
/Cassette_Unit.3A
-W928,-W929,-W930,-W931
BK,BK,BK,BK #13127
GND_PMI_POWER_DISTR:
/Light_Collector.1A
Input Firewire -W944,-W945,-W946,-W947

BK,BK,BK,BK #13128
GND_SCANNER_UNIT
/Scanner_Unit.2A
F7.0477.1087.0 6p FireWireCable
third parties without explicit authorisation is strictly forbidden.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information
1 A B #14073
/Light_Collector.3A
contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to
4
4
-ST33 DATE NAME
F7.0471.9197.0 -W960
F7.0477.1087.0 General Schematic Project
USER 03.01.2006 Leith.
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0B 39319 29.08.06 Leith. NORM Sheet name: FRAME / 100
0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 1
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

A B C IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for
A B C D E F G H
USER_INTERFACE
F8.5175.1580.X LED
CHIP READER RollerIpSensor rd gn

Erasure
1 F8.9499.6940.X 1
F7.0429.0008.0
F7.0471.8344.0
F7.0429.0033.0
+
+F7.0486.1401.0
*10/10
-P1
-ST5
-BU1
*4/4
-B2
1/6
2/6
3/6
4/6
5/6
6/6
f7-9499-6941-1.dfb
Reserve
-BU170
*10/10
F7.0471.8178.0
-BU76
*4/4
F7.0471.8339.0
F8.5175.8610.0
F8.5175.8620.0
-ST10
1/6
2/6
3/6
4/6
Supply on St10 Supply on BU170
LockingCassetteContact
toleranc limit +10% / -5% toleranc limit +/- 5%
CoverOpenerControl
AlignmentHomePos
-W917
4 = +24VDC
-W918
1,2 = +24VDC
LockingHomePos
OpenerHomePos
DrawerHomePos
LockingEndPos
FixerHomePos
3 = GND 8,9, = GND
-W919
F8.5175.8630.0B
-ST11
-BU77
-BU80
*10/10
1/6
2/6
3/6
4/6
*4/4
-P18
1/6
2/6
3/6
4/6
5/6
6/6
F7.0429.0033.0
-P15
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P12
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P13
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P14
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P3
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P5
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P8
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P9
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P10
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-P28
*10/10
F7.0429.0008.0
-BU1#14
2 *4/4 2
E-Label F7.0429.0036.0 Reset
T2,5A
-S1
T0,5A
T1A
T1A
-S1
L7.0426.0950.0 -W921
-BU5 F8.5175.8640.0
-BU78 -P16 POWER
2 1/1 BN 1/2 1/2
-F10
-F8
-F1#1
-F1#2
-BU4
1/1 1 4
-W922 LD1 +24VDC
F8.5175.8640.0 +39VDC User Interface +5V +5V_RF -BU87 -W916
BK 2/2 2/2 -P27 F8.5175.8590.0
L7.0471.9060.0 F7.0429.0044.0 *8/8 *8/8 X
F7.0429.0121.0 F7.0471.8341.0 /ERASURE_UNIT.2A
CassetteEdgeSensor IP-Handling-Board
F8.5175.8510.0 -BU79 -P4 -S2
*8/8 *8/8 Switch -S2
/FRAME.1E
/FRAME.4F
#13126
L7.0471.9093.0 F7.0429.0040.0
-F7 F8.5175.5230.X ON = start application
1
DIL-SWITCH
4
from Cassette Unit open 24VDC
Off = start debug monitor
OFF
Safety Switch T3,5A NC NC

Sheet 1
3 Supply on Bu79 -ST1#3 3
toleranc limit +/- CAN-Terminating *10/10
1,2,3,4 = +24VDC resistor 121 Ohm F7.0429.0023.0 Bootload / Debug
5,6,7,8 = GND
-P17
#2/11
F7.0429.0129.0
-W924_2
F7.0429.0040.0
F7.0429.0039.0
F7.0429.0040.0
F7.0429.0039.0
F7.0429.0040.0
F7.0429.0040.0
F7.0429.0039.0
F8.5175.8540.0
-BU131 -P17
X #9/10 #9/11
/Light_Collector.4A F7.0471.8924.0 F7.0429.0129.0
-P23
-P30
-P19
-P31
-P25
-P29
-P32
-B419
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
CAN BUS F7-5175-5231-A.dfb
-BU81
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
L7.0471.9093.0
-BU82
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
L7.0471.9119.0
-BU83
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
L7.0471.9093.0
-BU84
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
L7.0471.9119.0
-BU85
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
L7.0471.9093.0
-BU86
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
L7.0471.9093.0
SM-Alignment
Reserve
F8.5160.4519.0
BK
YE
F8.5175.8680.0
F8.5175.8660.0A
F8.5160.4519.0
F8.5175.8670.0
F8.5175.8670.0
4 4
YE
YE
BK
BK
YE
YE
YE
BK
YE (BU)
RD
WHRD
WHYE
RD
WHRD
WHYE
YE
RD
WHRD
WHYE
YE
RD
WHRD
WHYE
YE
WH
WH
RD
RD
GN GN GN GN
5 WHGN WHGN WHGN WHGN
M
M
BU
BU
WHBK
M WHBK
M WHBK
M WHBK
M 5
YE
YE
BK BK BK BK
-M1 -M3 -M5 -M6
F7.0430.8362.0 -M17 -M4 F7.0430.8357.0
F7.0430.8357.0 F7.0430.8364.0 F7.0430.8357.0
F7.0430.8364.0
SM-Fixer SM-Unlocking SM-Opener SM-Drawer SM-Roller SM-Roller-Clamping

6
6
DATE NAME
General Schematic Project
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0B 39319 29.08.06 Leith. NORM Sheet name: Cassette_Unit / 100
0A 38631 31.05.06 leith. Sheet 2
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. F1.5175.8503.0 of 9 SH

A B C D E F IDX Change-NR DATE NAME Replacement for
A B C D E F
Mirror
/Light_Collector.1F
1 1
X
NC NC
Laserdiode
-ST4
*8/8
F7.0429.0121.0
-ST3
*8/8
F7.0429.0121.0
F7.5175.8515.0
-W1071
-BU50 -W304 -BU51
D12 -ST1 F8.5175.2920.0 -ST2
*16/16 *16/16 *16/16 *16/16
Optical lense F7.0429.0029.0 F7.0471.8395.0 F7.0471.8395.0 F7.0429.0029.0
2 2
POWER BOARD OPTICS

LD not connected +5V
Supply on BU50 IC2 Supply on BU130
LED1
LD - MODULATOR - CR20
1, 2, 13 = GND MP1 tolerance limit +-5%
3,4 = +5V (+-2%)
F8.5170.2930.X
1, 14 = GND (+24V)
5, 6 = -5V (*-2%) -5V 2 = +24V
LD current control 12 = +10V (+-1%) MP2
F8.5175.2910.X
IC1 12, 25 = GND
Optical lense +10V MP3 13 = +12V
-ST1 24 = -12V
IC3 S/26
-ST3
*12/12 -ST1 -BU130
F7.0429.0032.0 #25/26 #25/26 #24
-BU1 F7.0429.0134.0 F7.0471.8879.0
*4/4
F7.0429.0036.0
E-Label
F7.0429.0121.0
F7.0429.0032.0
F7.0429.0008.0
Polygon -B317
*12/12
*10/10
-ST6
-ST7
-ST5
-B320
*8/8
F1-5170-2913-A.dfs F7-5170-2931-C.dfb
3 BL321 BL317 3
-BU148
*8/8
F7.0471.8341.0
-BU149
*12/12
F7.0471.8556.0
-BU172
*10/10
F7.0471.8178.0
-J1 -BU147 LINCOLN -W1065
F8.5175.2980.0
*2/2 *2/2 #6
F7.0471.1749.0 L7.0471.8947.0
-J5 -BU169 LINCOLN -W1066

F8.5175.2970.0
*10/10 *10/10 #10
GENERIC10 F7.0471.8820.0
-W1067
-B319
-CN1
*8/8
-BU171
*8/8
COPAL #7
F8.5175.2960.0
Polygon PCB GENERIC8 F7.0471.9053.0
BL319
4
4
DATE NAME
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0B 39319 29.08.06 Leith. NORM Sheet name: Scan_Modul / 100
0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 3
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

A B C D E F
Reset
from Cassette Unit open Safety Switch -P17
-LD53 +24.0V POL S/26
DIL-SWITCH
DIL-SWITCH
DIL-SWITCH
F8.5175.8510.0 T1A -W1071
-F17 -10V PMT -P17 -BU176 F7.5175.8515.0
#25/26 #25/26 X
/Scan_Modul.1F
-S2
-LD32 1,5VD
OFF
OFF
OFF
-S1
-S3
-S4
-BU129 IN 24VDC F7A T5A
-P3 -F25 -F13 24VDC
-L1#12 V33_PHY#12 -BU1#10
/FRAME.1E #13127 *8/8 *8/8 FPGA Test1 M32 Reserve 1 *4/4
2-3 OFF= Cfg.-EEPROM not write protected

1 /FRAME.4F F7.0429.0038.0 1
-L2#12
FPGA Test2 M32 Reserve 2 E-Label connector
V33_PHY
2-3 ON= Cfg.-EEPROM write protected

T1A -LD36
T2,5A -F23 +12V M32 Reserve 2 -P1#5
-F1#1 -W1070 FPGA NRESET *9/9
Supply on Bu129 +12V OPT F8.5175.8535.0A -LD52
FPGA Test 4 -LD34 Test connector
tolerance limit + / - 5% PWR_CAN
1,2,3,4= +24VDC 5.0VD
1-4 ON= Free Run Mode

-LD30 -LD33
FPGA Test 3
1-4 OFF= Start Monitor

5,6,7,8 = GND T3,5A -F15 1,5VD
-P5 -BU177 -BU178 -P36
*50/50 *50/50 #50 *50/50 *50/50
-LD45 M32 PMT + OK M32 Reserve 1 -LD35
T3,5A F7.0471.9202.0 L7.0472.1012.0 L7.0472.1012.0 F7.0471.9202.0 -P30
-F16 *10/10
3,3VD -LD46 M32 PMT - OK -LD37 RS232 Debug-Interface
M32 NCS 0
-P34
-LD47 M32 Analog OK -LD38 *10/10
T1A M32 NCS 1
-F18
Program and test connectors

+20V PMT -P22
*80/80 -LD48 M32 CAN OK M32 NCS 2 -LD39
EMI-BOX for
T1A PMI-BOARD
-F19 -P21
+20V PMT M32 LCD OK M32 NCS 3 -LD40
*80/80 -LD50
2 -ST1#1 2
T2,5A *10/10 -LD2 M32 WDG M32 OPT + OK -LD41 -W906
-F20
+8V Disp. -P16 -ST17 F8.5175.8550.0
-LD31 3,3VD M32 OPT - OK -LD42 *9/9 #9/10
DISTRIBUTION-BOARD -P1 F7.0471.8670.0 X /Scanner_Unit.1F
*10/10
T2,5A -F1
-12V OPT -LD51 ConF/FPGA done M32 CAL + OK -LD43 from EOL/BOL Sensor Array
T1A -F24
125mA
-F1#5 VCC_NODE PMI-BOARD M32 CAL - OK -LD44 -P24
*4/4
NC
PMI_POWER-
+8V Analog F8.5175.2290.X 1,25A

F8.5170.4980.X
CAN-Terminating -R1229
T2A resistor 121 Ohm +24.0V POL
-F27
Power Supply 300mA
F7.0471.9196.0
Polygon Motor 5.0VD_FW -R1#12
-P1#6
-B411
-P2#11
#9/11
S/11
S/11
-B410
*17/17
-P25
F7-5170-4981-0.dfb
*6/6
4991.DFB
*6
-ST23
P323326
-BU133
#9/10
F7.0471.8924.0
P1
+B422
3 3
+B422
PMT -BU1 -ST34
-W960:B
F8.5175.3040.X
9pol. DSUB
#14073
/FRAME.4F
-B422
-W924_1
F8.5175.8540.0
/Cassette_Unit.3A X
/Scanner_Unit.2A
Auto_Cal_LED
Light collector
4
4
DATE NAME
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0B 39319 29.08.06 Leith. NORM Sheet name: Light_Collector / 100
0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 4
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

A B C D E F
SlowScanliftPosSensor
F8.9499.5880.X
Distributor Board
-ST10
F8.5175.1560.X
*4/4
-B413
-BU146 -BU144 -W906
f7-9499-5881-0.dfb -P1 -P4 F8.5175.8550.0
#4 *4/4 *4/4 *10/10 *10/10 X
/Light_Collector.2F
-W1063 F7.0471.8339.0 L7.0429.0009.0 F7.0429.0008.0 F7.0471.8178.0
to PMI_P16
-BU63
*4/4
F8.5175.2410.0
1 -W1062 -BU145 -BU143 -W1064 1

F8.5175.8560.0 -P2 -P3 F8.5175.2415.0
#4 *4/4 *4/4 *10/10 *10/10
F7.0471.8339.0 L7.0429.0009.0 F7.0429.0008.0 F7.0471.8178.0
-BU64
*4/4
Supply on Bu67 -B421
tolerance limit + / - 5% F7-5175-1561-A.dfb
BL331
1,2,3,4= +24VDC
-BU1#4
*4/4
F7.0429.0036.0
5,6,7,8 = GND
-P3
*4/4
L7.0429.0009.0
-ST1#3
*10/10
F7.0429.0023.0
-P7
*8/8
F7.0429.0040.0
F8.5175.8510.0 T1A
-F1
24VDC
-BU67 -P4 Reset
/FRAME.1E #13128 *8/8 *8/8
/FRAME.4F L7.0471.9093.0 F7.0429.0040.0
from Cassette Unit open T1A -F1#1 SLOW-SCAN Board -S1
+5VDC
Safety Switch F8.5175.2120.X
-W924_1,-W924_2 ON = start application
F8.5175.8540.0
off = start debug monitor
-LD2
2 -BU132 -P5 2
F7.0449.4004.0
#9/10 #9/11 4 NC
/Light_Collector.4A
X
F7.0471.8924.0 F7.0429.0129.0 D19 D1 Calibration Board D18 D20
-S2
CAN_BUS -ST10 -BU127
DIL-SWITCH
OFF
Power ON *10/10 *10/10
-P5 F7.0429.0008.0 F7.0471.8178.0
#2/11
F7.0429.0039.0
F7.0429.0039.0
F7.0429.0129.0
-B415
1 BOL F8.5175.2990.X
-B412
EOL F7-5175-2991-A.dfb
F7-5175-2121-A.dfb
-P1
-P2
NC
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
-BU121
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
L7.0471.9119.0
-BU134
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
L7.0471.9119.0
F8.5175.8510.0
YE
F8.5175.2510.0
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
3 3
F7.0471.8480.0
1b
2b
3b
4b
-ST15
S7
1a
2a
3a
4a
-BU126
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
F8.5175.2640.0
YE
WHRD
RD
OG
BN
M
WHGN GN
4
M
RD
4
DATE NAME
YE

-M9 -M8 CR30-X 5175
F7.0430.8366.0 F7.0430.8291.0 APPR.
0B 39319 29.08.06 Leith. NORM Sheet name: Scanner_Unit / 100
SM-SlowScan SM-SlowScanLift 0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 5
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

A B C D E F
1 1
Erasure Unit
F8.5175.3990.X
LD1 red LD16
+B414 LD17 red LD31

F8.5175.8510.0 -BU61 -P3
/FRAME.1E #13125 *8/8 *8/8
/FRAME.3F L7.0471.9093.0 F7.0429.0038.0
from Cassette Unit open LD32 red LD47

Safety Switch Supply on BU61
toleranc limit + / - 5% T1A -F1#1
1,2,3,4 = 24VDC
5,6,7,8 = GND
+5V
2 F7.0459.0304.0 2
LD48 red LD62
T5A -F2
24VDC
F7.0459.0314.0
LD63 royalblue LD78

-W916 +B414
F8.5175.8590.0 -BU62 -P2
X *8/8 *8/8
/Cassette_Unit.2H
F7.0471.8341.0 F7.0429.0121.0
LD79 royalblue LD93
F7.0429.0044.0
-B414
+B414
F7-5175-3991-D.dfb
-P4
1/2
2/2
3 3
-BU175
1/2
2/2
L7.0471.9060.0
F8.5175.3520.0
BK
BK
BK
S12
F7.8149.6802.0
-S4 V
BK
4
4
DATE NAME
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0B 39319 29.08.06 Leith. NORM Sheet name: ERASURE_UNIT / 100
0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 6
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

A B C D E F
SCANNER_UNIT
-BU96#1 -W940,-W941
RD,RD
-BU67#1
BGR F8.5175.8510.0
-W940
RD
-W941 1
-BU98#1 RD
-W942 2
RD
1 -W943 3 1
RD
-W944 4
-BU105#1 BK
-W945 5
BK
-W946 6
BK
-W947 7
BK
-BU112#1 8
PMI_POWER_DISTR
-BU92#1
1 -BU129#1
-W924
RD
-W925 1
-BU91#1 RD
-W926 2
RD
1 -W927 3
RD
-W928 4
-BU110#1 BK
-W929
BK
5 SCANNER_UNIT
2 1 -W930 6 2
BK
-W931 7
BK
-BU111#1 8
1 -BU134#1 -W956 -BU123#1
BN
1 -W957 1
OG
2 -W958 2
RD
3 -W959 3
ERASURE_UNIT 4 YE
4
-BU99#1
1 -W948 -BU61#1
RD
-W949 1
-BU100#1 RD
-W950 2
RD
1 -W951 3
RD
-W952 4
-BU106#1 BK
-W953 5
BK
1 -W954 6
BK
-W955 7
BK
-BU107#1 8
3
1 3
CASSETTE_UNIT
-BU93#1
1 -W932 -BU79#1
RD
-W933 1
-BU94#1 RD
-W934 2
RD
1 -W935 3
RD
-W936 4
-BU108#1 BK
-W937 5
BK
1 -W938 6
BK
-W939 7
-BU109#1 BK
8
1
4
4
DATE NAME
Wiring Harness Supply Voltage Project
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0B 39319 29.08.06 Leith. NORM Sheet name: Wire_harness_5175.8510 / 100
0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 7
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

A B C D E F
BGR F8.5175.8580.0
1 1
-2#1 -W963 -BU73#1 -W961

1 RD 1 1 RD 1
-BU69#1 -BU90#1
-6#1 -W964 -BU71#1 -W962
1 RD 1 1 RD 1
-BU70#1 -BU97#1
-1#1 -W965 -W965
1 BK BK 1
-BU104#1
2
-7#1 -W966 -W966 2
1 BK BK 1
-BU103#1
3 3
4
4
DATE NAME
Wiring Harness Interlock Project
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 8
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

A B C D E F
BGR F8.5175.8585.0
1 1
-BU135#1 -W967
1 BK 1
-3#1
-BU136#1 -W968
1 BU 1
-4#1
-BU139#1 -W971
1 BU 1
-BU138#1
2 2
-BU140#1 -W972
1 BK 1
-BU141#1
-BU137#1 -W969 -W970

1 GNYE GNYE 1
-5#1
3 3
-PE#1
1
4
4
DATE NAME
Wiring Harness Input Voltage Project
APPR.
CR30-X 5175
0A 38631 31.05.06 Leith. Sheet 9
F1.5175.8503.0
© AGFA
37407 20.04.06 Leith. of 9 SH

Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS325.06M
DIGITIZERS
Type 5175/0100/0110
Edition 1, Revision 2
Internal update: 4
10-2007 printed in Germany

DD+DIS325.06M Spare Parts List
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:

(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair
or maintenance task on the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions"
and on the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:

• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the
procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com


10-2007 Type 5175/0100/0110 Agfa Company Confidential
Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous version 1.1
Revision Date
1.2 10-2007 Spare Parts List completely revised
Digitizer "White Label" added
Contact
Spare Parts ordering
Europe orderprocessing-europe.matrium@eads.com
Overseas orderprocessing-overseas.matrium@eads.com
Spare Parts returns
Worldwide returns.matrium@eads.com
NOTE:
For Recycling Information please refer to:
http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf


Contents
VERKLEIDUNG
COVER
REVETEMENT
PAGES 06 - 07
SCANBAUGRUPPE
SCAN UNIT
UNITE SCAN
PAGES 08 - 09
KLEINTEILE
SLOWSCAN SMALL PARTS
SLOWSCAN KIT PIÈCES
SLOWSCAN DÉTACHÉES
PAGES 10 - 11 PAGES 16 - 17
KASSETTEN
CASSETTES
CASSETTES
PAGES 18 - 19
SCHUBLADE KASSETTENEINHEIT
DRAWER CASSETTE UNIT
TIROIR MODULE DE CASSETTES
PAGES 14 - 15
SCHUBLADE
DRAWER
TIROIR
PAGES 12 - 13


How to navigate the spare parts list online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1) Open Bookmarks
(2) Click on "CONTENTS"
(3) See overview of the modules

(4) Click on requested module
(5) Appropriate page opens
(6) Click on green arrow to

navigate back to the overview
of the modules


01
03
06
08
07
05
02
04
5175_0100_8001.CDR
COVER


10-2007 TYPE 5175/0100/0110 Agfa Company Confidential
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+9517592000 * HAUBE MONTIERT CR30-X - 5175/0100
TOP COVER CR30-X
CAPOT CR30-X
1 CM+9517515400 * HAUBE MONTIERT DIGITIZER - 5175/0110
TOP COVER DIGITIZER
CAPOT DIGITIZER
2 CM+9517515041 * SEITE RECHTS, LACKIERT
RIGHT COVER
RÊVETEMENT DROITE
3 CM+9517515031 * SEITE LINKS, LACKIERT
LEFT COVER
RÊVETEMENT GAUCHE
4 CM+9517516302 * FRONT CR30-X - 5175/0100
FRONT COVER CR30-X
RÊVETEMENT DEVANT CR30-X
4 CM+9517516500 * FRONT DIGITIZER - 5175/0110
FRONT COVER DIGITIZER
RÊVETEMENT DEVANT DIGITIZER
5 CM+9517515800 USER INTERFACE
USER INTERFACE BOARD
USER INTERFACE BOARD
6 CM+9048614200 SNT 85-264VAC/24VDC-10,5A
POWER SUPPLY
ALIMENTATION AVEC INTERRUPTEUR
7 CM+9042663040 TÜR, DECKELSCHALTER
CASSETTE UNIT SAFETY SWITCH
PORTE, INTERRUPTEUR DE COUVERCLE
8 CM+9517585851 NETZTEILKABEL
POWER SUPPLY CABLE
CABLE D'ALIMENTATION
9 CM+9517591301 MODIFIKATION KIT CR30-X
MODIFIKATION KIT CR30-X
MODIFIKATION KIT CR30-X
10 CM+9517591600 SW CR30 PATTERN CD1.0
SW CR30 PATTERN CD1.0
SW CR30 PATTERN CD1.0
=Assembly
D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =No wearing part.
COVER


05
01
03
04
06
02
5175_0100_8002.CDR
SCAN UNIT


1 CM+9517590204 PMI BOARD VOLLST.
PMI BOARD
PMI BOARD
2 CM+9517527500 OPTIKBAUGRUPPE CR30-X
OPTIC MODULE CR30-X
ENSEMBLE OPTIQUE CR30-X
3 CM+9517049600 PMI POWER DISTRIBUTION II
PMI POWER DISTRIBUTION II
PMI POWER DISTRIBUTION II
4 CM+9517590103 PMT + LISA
PMT + LIGHT COLLECTOR
PMT + CONDUIT DE LUMIÈRE
5 CM+9047710870 FIREWIRE KABEL, 1.8 M
FIREWIRE CABLE, 1.8 M
CABLE FIREWIRE, 1.8 M
6 CM+9517524321 ÜBERZUG LICHTSAMMLER PMMA
LIGHT COLLECTOR MANTLE
LIGHT COLLECTOR MANTLE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SCAN UNIT


04
05
02
03
06
07
5175_0100_8003.CDR
SLOWSCAN


1 CM+9517524000 SLOWSCAN
SLOWSCAN UNIT
UNITE SLOWSCAN
2 CM+9517526501 SCHAUMANDRUCKWALZE VOLLST (2 STCK.)
UPPER SCAN ROLLERS (2 PIECES)
ROEULEAU DE PRESSION (2 PIÈCES)
3 CM+9517523100 BÜRSTENWINKEL MONTIERT
ANTISTATIC BRUSH
BAGUETTE A BROSSES
4 CM+9517521200 SLOWSCAN BOARD
SLOWSCAN BOARD
SLOWSCAN BOARD
5 CM+9517524702 KALBRIERPLATTE VOLLST.
CALIBRATION BOARD
PLAQUE DE CALIBRAGE
6 CM+9517515600 DISTRIBUTOR BOARD
DISTRIBUTOR BOARD
DISTRIBUTOR BOARD
7 CM+9517590801 POSTSCAN ESD BÜRSTE
POSTSCAN ESD BRUSH
POSTSCAN ESD BRUSH
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SLOWSCAN


01
06
05
05
03
03
02
04
07
08
5175_0100_8004.CDR
DRAWER


1 CM+9517536001 LÖSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE D'EFFACEMENT
2 CM+9517561004 TRANSPORTSCHLITTEN
DRAWER UNIT
CHARIOT DE TRANSPORT
3 CM+9517561250 MAGNET, GEKLEBT (3 STCK.)
PERMANENT MAGNETS (3 PIECES)
FIXATION, COLLÉ (3 PIÈCES)
4 CM+9949969500 IR-REFLEX AKTIV VERGOSSEN
ROLLER IP SENSOR
PHOTOCELLULE DE REFLEXION
5 CM+9517590302 WALZENPAARE
INPUT ROLLERS
PAIRE DE ROULEAUX
6 CM+9517585901 IP-HANDLING ERASURE CABLE
IP-HANDLING ERASURE CABLE
IP-HANDLING ERASURE CABLE
7 CM+9517560010 DRAWER ADJUSTMENT TOOL
DRAWER ADJUSTMENT TOOL
DRAWER ADJUSTMENT TOOL
8 CM+9517563400 HEBEKULISSENLAGER
BEARING FOR CONNECTING LINK
PALIER POUR COULISSE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
DRAWER


01
02
08
03
07
06
05
04
5175_0100_8005.CDR


1 CM+9517552002 KASSETTENÖFFNER
CASSETTE OPENER UNIT
SYSTÈME D'OUVERTURE CASSETTE
2 CM+9516050060 ANTISTATIKBÜRSTE
ANTISTATIC BRUSH - (CASSETTE UNIT ENTRY)
BROSSE ANTISTATIQUE
3 CM+9048614170 CHIP READER
CHIP READER
CHIP READER
4 CM+9517556002 KASSETTENENTRIEGLER
CASSETTE UNLOCKING UNIT
CASSETTE DEVERROUILLAGE
5 CM+9517590402 KASSETTENAUFNAHME
CASSETTE FIXATION UNIT
LONGEMENT DE CASSETTE
6 CM+9517590600 SCHALTER 001 V4 ST28ROHEBEL
CASSETTE EDGE SENSOR
MICRORUPTEUR
7 CM+9517552301 IP HANDLING BOARD
IP HANDLING BOARD
IP HANDLING BOARD
8 CM+9517590500 ZAHNRIEMEN F. KASSETTENEINHEIT
TOOTHED BELTS FOR CASSETTE UNIT
POULIE A COURROIE POUR MODULE CASSETTE
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.


01
2x 2x
M2x10 (DIN912) 2 x 14 (DIN7)

(Mounting of cassette edge sensor) (Mounting of gears in transport unit)
1x
2x
Spring washer D = 2,2 mm (DIN127) Special screw M3

(Mounting of cassette edge sensor) (Mounting of permanent magnets
at drawer unit)
3x
4x
Screw M 4 x 12 (DIN912) Screw M 4 x 8 (DIN912)

(Mounting of covers) (Mounting of cassette unit)
3x 2x
Spring washer D = 4,3 mm (DIN127) M2 (DIN 439)

(Mounting of cassette unit) (Mounting of cassette edge sensor)
4x Micro fuses 2 x 0.5 A 5 x 1.0 A

2 x 2.0 A 3 x 2.5 A
3 x 3.5 A 2 x 5.0 A
Washer d = 4,3 mm (DIN9021) 2 x 7.0 A
(Mounting of front cover)
5175_0100_8006.CDR
SMALL PARTS


1 CM+9517590701 CR30-X KLEINTEILSET
CR30-X SMALL PARTS KIT
CR30-X KIT PIÈCES DÉTACHÉES
2 CM+9517591401 FLFS UPGRADE KIT CR30-X
FLFS UPGRADE KIT CR30-X
FLFS UPGRADE KIT CR30-X
3 CM+9517591950 FIREWIRE-STECKER MONTIERT
FIREWIRE PLUG
FIREWIRE FICHE
4 CM+9517590900 TYPVERPACKUNG CR30-X
TYPE PACKAGING CR30-X
EMBALLAGE TYPE CR30-X
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
SMALL PARTS


REAR SIDE
05* - 09*
01* - 04*
5175_0100_8007.CDR
CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 T


1 CM+9518052001 SCHUBLADE + IP 35X43
TRAY + IP 35X43
TIROIR + IP 35X43
2 CM+9518252001 SCHUBLADE + IP 24X30
TRAY + IP 24X30
TIROIR + IP 24X30
3 CM+9518352001 SCHUBLADE + IP 18X24
TRAY + IP 18X24
TIROIR + IP 18X24
4 CM+9518452001 SCHUBLADE + IP 15X30
TRAY + IP 15X30
TIROIR + IP 15X30
5 CM+9518053001 LEERKASSETTE 35X43
BLANK CASSETTE 35X43
CASSETTE BLANC 35X43
9 10+999912560 CM MD4.0T FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
CM MD4.0T FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
CM MD4.0T FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
=Assembly
* =No wearing part.
CASSETTE CR MD 4.0 T


Spare Parts Kit Categories
R 'Repair' Parts required to repair a machine

Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
• number of machines
• extension of the service area
• local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
• stockpiling
I 'Installation' Parts required to install a machine

Kit `I`should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance' Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
L 'Local stock' Extremely expensive or bulky parts

Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
Spare Parts Kit Order numbers
Order number Spare Part Kit version

not applicable


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type No. Specification

CR 30-X 5175/0100 -
Digitizer (WhiteLabel) 5175/0110 -
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order number

TABLE FOR CR30-X EWRP3


Document No: DD+DIS325.06M
Technical Modifications reserved.
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
www.agfa.com


HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation
Order-No.: DD+DIS171.06E
*16BXWZ1*
1 Piece 6BXWZ MA1
CR30-X
Type 5175/100
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS171.06E
Document Node ID:12076099

printed in Germany eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v01
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
Maintenance DD+DIS171.06E
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
1. Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation,
repair or maintenance task on the equipment.
2. Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety
Directions" and on the product.

Chapter 9 CR30-X Edition 1, Revision 0
DD+DIS171.06E Maintenance
Chapter 9
List of Contents
1 General Information on Preventive Maintenance......................1

1.1 Maintenance Frequency ................................................................................. 1
1.2 Required Time ................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Required Tools................................................................................................ 1
1.4 Required Cleaning Material............................................................................ 2
1.5 Required Spare Parts ..................................................................................... 2
2 Diagnostics ...................................................................................3
2.1 Questioning of the Customer ........................................................................ 3
2.2 Info Counter Analysis..................................................................................... 3
2.3 Reset of the Relative Counters...................................................................... 4
2.4 E-Label Analysis ............................................................................................. 4
2.5 Documenting current Image Quality ............................................................. 5
3 Maintenance - Power off ..............................................................6

3.1 Visual Inspection ............................................................................................ 6
3.2 Cleaning........................................................................................................... 6
3.3 Cleaning of the Scan Line .............................................................................. 7
3.4 Cleaning of the Scan Rollers ......................................................................... 7
3.5 Checking of Cassette Condition.................................................................... 7
3.6 Checking and Cleaning of Image Plates....................................................... 8
4 Maintenance - Power On............................................................10

4.1 Check of Safety Switch ................................................................................ 10
4.2 Checking Images on the Workstation......................................................... 10
4.3 Performing Test Cycles................................................................................ 10
4.4 Technical Image Quality Check of the System .......................................... 10
4.4.1 Preparing the Flatfield..................................................................................... 11
4.4.2 Importing the Test Patterns “Lowest Acceptable Quality” ............................... 11
4.4.3 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station................................ 12

5 Completion of the Maintenance ............................................... 13

5.1 Reset of Maintenance Indicator ...................................................................13
5.2 Creating a Backup of Device specific Data.................................................13
5.3 Customer Conversation................................................................................13

Chapter 9 / II CR30-X Edition 1, Revision 0
1 General Information on Preventive Maintenance
To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points listed
below (minimum maintenance points) must be carried out.
• The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable

order to make the work routines as efficient as possible.
The sequence of the maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is
identical with these maintenance instructions.
• During the maintenance procedure always consider the Generic Safety
Directions, see section 0 of the Technical Documentation.
• Check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as
additional maintenance points!
1.1 Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• every 12.000 image plate cycles
or
• once a year
1.2 Required Time
REQUIRED TIME:
approximately 2 h
1.3 Required Tools

Cu filter (for exposure of test images) CM+9 5155 1015 2
Flashlight Commercially available
Compact Disc Recordable Commercially available
Hex key 3 mm Commercially available

Type 5175/100 Agfa CoAgfa Company Confidential
1.4 Required Cleaning Material
In addition to the standard equipment the following cleaning substances are

required:
Vacuum cleaner (220/240V, 50Hz) CM+9 9999 0895 0
or commercially available
Dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x) CM+9 9999 0896 0
ADC screen cleaner (4 bottles) CM+9.9999.9288.0
Canned Air commercially available
Lint-free cloth commercially available
1.5 Required Spare Parts
During preventive maintenance no parts have to be replaced.

2 Diagnostics
2.1 Questioning of the Customer
(1) Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last
maintenance.
2.2 Info Counter Analysis
(1) On the processing station select

"Start → Programs → CR30-X
Service Client → General
Device Info → Info Counter"
(2) Select "Entire Device"
(3) Select tab "Values" and check
the different entries
(4) Select tab "Counters" and check
the different entries
(5) Select tab "Lists" and check the
different entries
(6) Repeat steps (3) to (5) for the
other nodes.
Figure 1

2.3 Reset of the Relative Counters

(1) In the Infocounter select the node "Entire device".
(2) Select tab “Counters”.
(3) Select all events (select upper most event, then select lowest event with
the shift key pressed)
(4) Select "Reset Counter"
(5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all other nodes)
2.4 E-Label Analysis
(1) In the CR30 Service Client select "General Device Info → E-Label"
(2) Check all the Values in the list of each node.
Especially look at the values:
• 5 Most Frequent Device Errors
• Last Repair Date
• Mean Cycles between Failures of the Product
• Number of Repairs
• 10 Last Module Specific Errors

2.5 Documenting current Image Quality
(1) Expose a 35 x 43 cm cassette with 20 µGy:

Take two exposures of 10 µGy (12.0 mAs - 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with
1.5 mm Cu filter) turned by 180°. See NOTE below.
For exposure place the cassette in length direction to the X-ray tube, see
Figure 2.
Rotating X-Ray tube

Anode
Cathode
517509aa.cdr
Figure 2
(2) Let the cassette be scanned by the digitizer

(4) Keep the image as reference image "before maintenance"
NOTE:
The parameters "12.0 mAs - 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with 1.5 mm Cu filter"
are approximate values that may vary within the X-ray devices to reach the
specified dose of 10 µGy.
In addition it is not essential to expose exactly with the dose of 2 x 10 µG.
The allowed range is between 8 and 50 µG.

3 Maintenance - Power off

3.1 Visual Inspection
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Flashlight
• Hey key 3 mm
(1) Switch off the digitizer

(2) Unplug the mains and FireWire connector of the CR30-X
(3) Check overall condition of the device for obvious changes or damage.
(4) Check the condition of the power and FireWire cable
(5) Remove all covers including the rear cover
(6) Check the condition of the cables inside the digitizer, especially in the
area of the cassette unit.
(7) Check of discharge brushes (Scan unit entry and Cassette unit entry) for
wear
(8) Remove the erasure unit and cover plate above the drawer unit
(9) Check condition of the 4 belts in the cassette unit.
3.2 Cleaning
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Vacuum cleaner
(1) Vacuum the inside of the digitizer

3.3 Cleaning of the Scan Line
IMPORTANT:
Only clean the scan line, if vertical stripes are visible in the image made
under step 2.5, Documenting current Image Quality.
Otherwise skip this step.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Cleaning brush (attached to the digitizer "Cassette Unit")
(1) Clean the scan line by wiping with the cleaning brush a few times over
the whole scan length.
The last movement must be continuous from rear to front.
3.4 Cleaning of the Scan Rollers
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Lint free cloth
• ADC screen cleaner
(1) With one hand turn the slow scan unit drive
(2) Clean the two lower scan rollers with a lint free cloth lightly soaked with
ADC screen cleaner
(3) Mount all covers again
3.5 Checking of Cassette Condition
(1) Check the following items of the cassettes:

- outside condition
- shutter
- obvious damage due to drop of cassette

3.6 Checking and Cleaning of Image Plates
IMPORTANT:
• Image plate and tray always belong together. Do not take an image plate
of one tray and put it in another tray.
• Use only AGFA screen cleaner and a soft lint-free cellulose cloth to clean
the image plate.
• Use only a dry cloth or blow away possible dust with compressed air to
clean the tray.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Lint free cloth
• ADC screen cleaner
(1) Insert a key or a pen into the

cassette lock 1
(2) Open the shutter.
2
(3) Turn the cassette around, so that
the black tube side is above.
(4) Let the black tray and image
1
plate slide out carefully onto the
table
517509ad.cdr
Figure 3
(5) Put the black tray with the image

plate onto the cassette
(6) The tray has 2 little hooks. Put
the tray onto the cassette in such
a way that the hooks reach over
the border of the cassette. This 517509ae.cdr
to avoid a bending of the tray.
(7) Check the image plate for
scratches
(8) Clean the image plate and the Figure 4
tray as follows:

• Moisten the cloth with cleaner and wipe the image plate surface
softly and evenly (phosphorous side and rear side).
• Leave the image plate surface to dry for about 10 minutes to allow
the solvents to evaporate.
• Use only a dry cloth or blow away possible dust with compressed
air (canned air), to clean the tray thoroughly. (DO NOT USE A
SCREEN CLEANER TO CLEAN THE TRAY.)
• Once the image plate surface is dry (after about 10 minutes), check
once again for particles of material and other impurities
(9) Put the tray with the image plate

back into the cassette.
(10) Verify that the white phosphor
side is oriented to the black tube 1 White phosphor side
side of the cassette and that the
shutter does not scratch the 2
image plate. Black tube side of the cassette

517509af.cdr
Figure 5
(11) Insert a key or a pen into the

cassette lock while closing the
shutter
517509ag.cdr
Figure 6

4 Maintenance - Power On
4.1 Check of Safety Switch

(2) Pull out the cassette unit approx. 1 cm (approx. 0.4 in.): The "cassette unit
open safety switch" has to switch off the digitizer.
(3) Close the cassette unit.
4.2 Checking Images on the Workstation
(1) Check the last 20 to 40 images on the Workstation, to see if artifacts or

other image quality problems occurred.
4.3 Performing Test Cycles

(1) In the CR30-X service client select "Analysis & Repair → Endurance Run
Cycles"
(2) Carry out five test cycles with each available cassette format.
4.4 Technical Image Quality Check of the System
During the “Technical Image Quality Check” of the system a flatfield is

exposed and compared at the lightbox with two test patterns “lowest
acceptable quality”. This procedure is divided in 3 steps:
# Step Details see…

1 Expose a flatfield, scan and print or archive the image 4.4.1
2 At the NX workstation import and print or archive the 4.4.2
two test patterns
• “lowest acceptable quality in slow scan direction”
• “lowest acceptable quality in fast scan direction”
3 Compare the scanned flatfield with the two imported 4.4.3
test patterns “lowest acceptable quality”.

4.4.1 Preparing the Flatfield
(1) Expose a 35 x 43 cm cassette with 20 µGy:

Take two exposures of 10 µGy (12.0 mAs - 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with
1.5 mm Cu filter) turned by 180°. See NOTE below.
For exposure place the cassette in length direction to the X-ray tube, see
Figure 7.
Rotating X-Ray tube

Anode
Cathode
517509aa.cdr
Figure 7
(2) Let the cassette be scanned by the digitizer

NOTE:
The parameters "12.0 mAs - 75kVP - 1.3 m distance with 1.5 mm Cu filter"
are approximate values that may vary within the X-ray devices to reach the
specified dose of 10 µGy.
In addition it is not essential to expose exactly with the dose of 2 x 10 µG.
The allowed range is between 8 and 50 µG.
4.4.2 Importing the Test Patterns “Lowest Acceptable Quality”

(1) Insert the Backup CD ROM of the digitizer into the CD ROM Drive
(2) On the NX workstation select the Main Menu
(3) Select “import images”
(4) Browse to the CD ROM drive
(5) Select the folder of the test patterns
(6) Select OK
(7) Wait till the images are imported (approx. 30 secs.)
(8) Select the Examination menu

4.4.3 Checking the Images at the Lightbox or Viewing Station
(1) Compare the flatfield made before maintenance with the one made under
step 4.4.1.
(2) At the lightbox or the viewing station visually compare the scanned
flatfield with the two test patterns
- “lowest acceptable quality in slow scan direction”
- “lowest acceptable quality in fast scan direction”
Evaluation:
• If the scanned image visually looks as good or better than the test
patterns, the image quality is okay.
• If there are unacceptable effects in slow scan or fast scan direction
see chapter 3.3, Troubleshooting.
NOTE:
The slow scan direction is always the long side of the scanned area.
43 cm 24 cm
18 cm
Slow scan
direction 35 cm
30 cm
24 cm
30 cm
15 cm 517509ab.cdr

5 Completion of the Maintenance
5.1 Reset of Maintenance Indicator
(1) In the CR30-X service client select "Maintenance Indicator"

(2) Select "Confirm" at "Reset of Maintenance Indicator"
5.2 Creating a Backup of Device specific Data
(1) In the CR30-X service client select "Backup & Restore"

(2) Confirm that property "compress" is activated
(3) Select "Backup selected files"
(4) In the "save as" dialogue select directory "D:\backup\CR 30-X
(5) Save the file with date and serial number in the file name
(6) Copy the file additionally to a USB stick and store the file on a save place
5.3 Customer Conversation
(1) Fill out the Maintenance checklist and hand it out to the customer.
(2) Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer.

Copyright © 2006-09, DD+DIS171.06E Agfa-Gevaert AG
All rights reserved
Published by
Agfa-Gevaert AG
Fototechnik
D - 81539 München
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany.

HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation Checklist
Order-No.: DD+DIS171.06E
CR30-X
Type 5175/100
Work Instruction for order no. SN IP cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:
Every 12 months or 12 000 image plate cycles
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions DD+DIS171.06E.
Diagnostics not
OK OK
Questioning of the • Questioning of the customer about problems with
customer the digitizer.
Infocounter analysis • Read-out and analyzation of the infocounter
Reset of the Relative • Reset of relative counters of all nodes
Counters
E-Label Analysis • E-label analysis of all nodes
Documenting current • Exposure and print or archive of a flatfield.
Image Quality
Document Node ID: Node ID

eq_09_maintenance-checklist_e_template_v01


Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS171.06E
Maintenance points - Power off not

OK OK
Visual Inspection • Visual check of
o Power and FireWire cable.
o Covers
o Cables inside the digitizer
o Discharge brushes (Scan unit entry and
Cassette unit entry)
o 4 belts in the cassette unit
Cleaning • Cleaning the inside with a vacuum cleaner
Cleaning of the Scan • Cleaning of the Scan Line if dust stripes are visible
Line
Cleaning of scan • Cleaning of the 2 lower scan rollers
rollers
Checking of Cassette • Check of all cassettes for damage
Condition
Checking and • Check of all image plates for scratches
Cleaning of Image
• Cleaning of all image plates
Plates

Chapter 9 / II CR30-X Edition 1, Revision 0

DD+DIS171.06E Maintenance Checklist
Maintenance points - Power on not

OK OK
Check of safety switch • Opening of cassette unit approx. 1 cm (approx. 0.4
in.) to check function of safety switch
Checking Images on • Checking of the last 20 to 40 images on the
the Workstation workstation, to see if artifacts or other image
quality problems occurred.
Performing Test • Performing of 5 test cycles per cassette format
Cycles
Technical Image • Exposure and check of flatfield.
Quality Check of the Comparison with flatfield made before
System maintenance.
Comparison with test patterns "lowest acceptable
quality" (slow scan / fast scan direction)
Completion not
OK OK
Reset of Maintenance • Reset of Maintenance Indicator
Indicator
Creating a Backup of • Creating a Backup
Device specific Data • Storage on hard disk and on service PC
Customer conversation • Explanation of results of preventive maintenance.

Edition 1, Revision 0 CR30-X Chapter 9 / III

Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS171.06E
Remarks:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ...................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer

Chapter 9 / IV CR30-X Edition 1, Revision 0

Service Information Bulletin
HEALTHCARE No. 21
Imaging Services
Document no.: DD+DIS338.07E

CR 30-X / Digitizer
Type 5175 / 100/110
This bulletin is for information only
DELL Latitude D830 available as component for

CR 30-X systems (digitizer types 5175/100 and /110)
Purpose of this document

• it informs about the new NX laptop PC DELL Latitude D830 as component of
CR 30-X systems (digitizer types 5175/100 and /110).
• it contains the specific setup procedure for the DELL Latitude D830 and digitizer.
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this bulletin by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
10-2007 Document Node ID: 19441976

global_service_bulletin_template_v01
Service Information Bulletin DD+DIS338.07E
1 Introduction
Subject The DELL Latitude D830 laptop PC has been introduced in production as optional
workstation PC for CR 30-X digitizers (5175/100) and digitizers type 5175/110.
The DELL Latitude D830 is staged in production with NX 2.0.6805 SU1
For ABC code, prerequisites and technical data of the DELL Latitude D830 refer to the
NX 2.0 Service Information Bulletin No. 9 (DD+DIS323.07E) on MedNet GSO library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ NX 2.0 Æ Service Bulletin
2 Prerequisites
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS:
• CR 30-X Service Manual, chapter 1 “Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures”
(DD+DIS150.06E).
• NX 2.0 Service Information Bulletin No. 9 “NX Laptop PC -DELL Latitude D830-
available for CR30-X Systems” (DD+DIS323.07E)
3 Setup Procedure
This section describes the specific setup procedure for the DELL Latitude D830 and
CR 30-X/digitizer type 5175/110.
For more information on the setup procedure that is not specific for the laptop, refer to
CR 30-X Service Manual, chapter 1 “Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures”
(DD+DIS150.06E).
NOTE:
The Laptop does not require a UPS and does not require grounding
Arrange the workstation PC, the digitizer and the multiple socket outlet as shown in figure 1
or similar:
IMPORTANT:
Do not place the laptop on top of the CR 30-X, because the accumulated heat developed
by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the operation of the system.
Page 2 of 4 CR 30-X No. 21

DD+DIS338.07E Service Information Bulletin
FireWire
Gender
Changer
FireWire
figure 1 – Example on how to setup digitizer and workstation
Follow these steps:
(1) The laptop PC has a 4 pin FireWire socket. A 6 to 4 pin FireWire gender changer is
delivered with the laptop. Plug this adapter into the 4 pin socket of the laptop:
figure 2 – 6 to 4 pin FireWire gender changer
NOTE:
The gender changer delivered with the laptop may look different then
indicated in figure 2.
(2) A FireWire Interface cable (FWI) is delivered with the digitizer. Connect the
FWI cable between the laptop (FireWire gender changer) and digitizer.
WARNING:
Using a FWI cable > 4.5 m (15 ft) may lead to unstable or no communication between
digitizer and NX workstation: Retakes possible.
To connect digitizer and NX processing station, use the FWI cable delivered with the
digitizer only!
No. 21 CR 30-X Page 3 of 4

(3) Connect the multiple socket outlet to the mains power wall outlet.
(4) Connect the power cable of the digitizer and of the laptop PC to the multiple socket
outlet.
WARNING:
Using different power circles may lead to ground potential differences: In this case the
leakage current via FireWire cable may exceed the limits as defined by IEC 60601:
Confirm that both, NX workstation and digitizer are connected to the same ground, e.g. via
multiple socket outlet.
4 Version history
Version Change Date
1.0 Initial Release 2007-10

Document Status: Approved Livelink ID: 18799955 Version: 8
HEALTHCARE Service Bulletin

No. 20
Imaging Services

CR 30-X
Type 5175 / 100/110
Software CRE_1405 released to support FLFS Cassette

and “White Label Digitizer”
Task
Timing Category Scope
Apply at all sites HQ issue: #
HQ_0708220004
Apply at affected sites
Next service HQ_0706210002
as listed below
Optional to improve
functionality of product
Task Tracking
After completion of your task the following entry in your Service Report is required: DD+DIS329.07E *
* Insert the document number into the field "Comment" (SMS form)
Purpose of this document:This document describes the new features of software CRE_1405
as well as the solved bugs compared to software CRE_1309A.
New features:
• Support of dedicated FLFS Cassettes
• Support of digitizer type 5175/110
Solved bugs:
• Corrupted E-Label after Software Upgrade to CRE_1309 or exchange of the slow scan
board (HQ_0708220004)
• Acceptance test shows too high SAL values (HQ_0706210002)
• CR 30-X Service Client Function "Diagnose Cycle" does not work
Affected serial number(s) / batch:
Software upgrade is recommended for all digitizers with SN < 2730
The signatures on the approval page indicate the solutions described in this Service Bulletin
have been reviewed for reportability and are NOT reportable because no actions are taken to
reduce a "Risk to Health".
This Bulletin replaces the earlier Service Bulletin No. 16, DD+DIS258.07E, Full Leg / Full Spine
(FLFS) Application released for already installed CR 30-X Systems
11 - 2007 Document Node ID: 18799955

Service Bulletin DD+DIS329.07E
1 Introduction
Software CRE_1405 is available on MEDNET and used in production for digitizers type
5175/100 SN ≥ 2730 and type 5175/110 SN ≥ 6001.
1.1 New Features of Software CRE_1405
Support of Software CRE_1405 improves Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) functionality by
FLFS
cassettes • overscan of image plates that are used in FLFS cassettes
• support of dedicated 35x43 cm FLFS cassettes. These cassettes have approx. 10 mm
of back-scatter protection removed to allow overlapping of cassettes.
Backscatter
FLFS
Protection
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 1
By these two improvements the stitched image on the NX processing station has a reduced
gray stitching line between the single images (< 1.5 mm).
Support of With software CRE_1405 a new digitizer with sub-type 5175/110 is released:
“White Label
Digitizer” Functional difference: Reduced throughput for 35x43 cm cassettes from 70 IPs/h (Type
5175/100) to 50 IPs/h (Type 5175/110).
This digitizer is a “white label” device without any indication of brand or name.
Serial numbers for sub-type 5175/110: SN ≥ 6001

DD+DIS329.07E Service Bulletin
1.2 Solved Bugs with Software CRE_1405 compared to CRE_1309A

Software CRE_1405 contains following bug-fixes:
1.2.1 Image Plate transport stops before Scan Unit due to corrupted Slow Scan Board
E-Label. (HQ_0708220004)
Symptom In some cases after software upgrade to CRE_1309 or exchange of the slow scan board the
digitizer stops scanning when the first image plate enters the scan unit, due to a corrupted
slow scan E-Label:
In this case the digitizer waits for information which is normally stored in the E-label.
No error message is issued. The digitizer boots-up properly, as the corrupted slow scan board
e-label parameters are not used during boot-up. With a reset the image plate is returned in the
cassette. Scanning the next image plate gives the same result.
Defect Software problem
Solution Perform software upgrade to CRE_1405. In software CRE_1405 a mechanism is implemented

which is able to handle wrong information in E-labels.
IMPORTANT:
Due to this improvement in software CRE_1405, a software upgrade to software CRE_1405
(or higher version) is required after exchange of the slow scan board (CM+9 5175 2120 X) or
the slow scan unit (CM+9 5175 2400 X).
Both spare parts have an enclosure document (Document number: DD+DIS365.07E) included
as of Q IV/2007, which describes this requirement.
1.2.2 Acceptance test shows too high SAL Values (HQ_0706210002)

Symptom At acceptance test execution the sensitivity test (75 kV, 1.5mm Cu, 2x 10 myGy) yields more
than 2000 SAL. Expected: 1800 SAL
Defect Non MD 4.0 image plate optimized correlation between IP code (part of the information on the
ID chip) and physical IP sensitivity.
Solution Perform software upgrade to CRE_1405. In software CRE_1405 the reference between IP
code and sensitivity is optimized.

NOTE:After installation of CRE_1405 the displayed lgM values will be slightly reduced
(approx. 0.07; i.e. if lgM for a certain examination was 1.7 in average, it is afterwards 1.63 in
average if the exposure parameters and exposure technique are kept constant).
1.2.3 CR 30-X Service Client Function "Diagnose Cycle" does not work
Symptom CR 30-X Service Client Function "Diagnose Cycle" can be executed, it stays however with
screen "Loading ESF". It is not possible to check any function by the diagnose cycle.
Defect Software problem
Solution In software CRE_1405 the missing functionality is implemented to start the diagnose cycle
successfully.
2 Prerequisites
Required TRAINING for FLFS with CR 30-X:

Web Based Training: “CR Systems & FLFS – CR 30-X”.
This WBT is available on the AGFA Learning Platform (ALP) and is attached to this
document.
Download software CRE_1405 from MEDNET:

GSO Library > Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers > CR30-X > Freeware.
The ZIP file on MEDNET has a readme.pdf with installation instructions included.

To support FLFS functionality order following FLFS dedicated Accessories via

ABC-Code:
Part ABC- Comment
Code
License Key for E2MX6 NX Full Leg Full Spine License Key
NX
Cassette CR E2LTT Can be used for FLFS and CR application. Image quality in
MD4.0T FLFS the overlap zone (1 cm) may be reduced. Min. 2 cassettes
35x43 cm with IP are recommended.
CR Full body EAUGV Mandatory for FLFS application; Note: The CR Planfeld Grid
cassette holder is included in the CR Full Body Cassette Holder delivery .
The CR Planfeld grid is required by software for proper
stitching calculations.
CR Easylift EJ8V8 Optional for FLFS application
Antiscatter Grid ECJ8M Optional for FLFS application
CR Easylift Optional FLFS Hardware Components

CR Antiscatter Grid V2
CR Full Body Cassette Holder CR Planfeld Grid
Figure 2
New Application License File:

By ordering the NX Full Leg Full Spine License Key you have to install a new Application
License File (alf) on the NX 2.0.68xx Processing Station, which must include the license for
Full Leg / Full Spine.
This alf – file will be provided by your NSO before the installation.

New, updated user manuals:

With initial release of the FLFS option in August 2007, following updated user manuals were
sent to your local NSO:
• CR 30-X System User Manual 2385A
• CR Full Leg Full Spine option for NX Workstations User Manual 4408C
IMPORTANT:
Please contact your local sales representative to get a CD with the updated user manuals as
mentioned above. This CD has to be handed out to the customer.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• USB stick
IMPORTANT:
Software CRE_1405 has only been tested with processing station software NX 2.0.6805 SU1.
It is mandatory to make a software upgrade to NX 2.0.6805 SU1 (or higher version), too, if not
yet done.
3 Instructions
REQUIRED TIME:
• Approx. 60 min. for software upgrade CRE_1405
• Additional 6 hours, if the NX processing station has not yet been upgraded to NX
2.0.6805.
Details see NX 2.0 - Service Bulletin No. 04 - Release of NX 2.0.6805, DD+DIS139.07E
• Additional 0,5 hours if the NX processing station has not yet been updated to NX
2.0.6805 SU1.
Details see NX 2.0 Service Bulletin No. 08, Software Update NX 2.0.6805 SU1 solves
Software Defects, DD+DIS320.07E.
• Additional 20 min. for customer instruction concerning FLFS application.
(1) Perform software Upgrade to CRE_1405 as described in the readme which is part of the
software on MEDNET
(2) If not yet done: Perform software upgrade to NX 2.0.6805 SU1

(3) If the customer also uses the FLFS application instruct him about
Hardware:
Cassette overlap zones and interaction with stitching zone
References:
- CR 30-X System User Manual 2385 A and
- CR Full Leg Full Spine option for NX Workstations User Manual, 4408 C
FLFS workflow: Perform 2 -3 exposures

Reference:
- CR Full Leg Full Spine option for NX Workstations User Manual, 4408 C
NX 2.0 Software:
Stitching user interface examination pane (manual, automatic) and
Editing of stitched images
References:
- NX 2.0 User Manual 4420 D and
- NX 2.0 Key User Manual 4421 D
(4) Hand-out the CD Rom with the updated user manuals:

• CR 30-X System User Manual 2385A
• CR Full Leg Full Spine option for NX Workstations User Manual 4408C
4 Verification
(1) Wait till the status indicator at the digitizer switches to green
(2) Insert cassette with unexposed IP in the digitizer
(3) At the processing station select examination type “System diagnosis – Flatfield”
(4) Select “ID” to identify the image: Scanning starts.
(5) Confirm that the image arrives at the NX processing station
5 Keywords
FLFS, full leg / full spine, CRE 1405
6 Version history
Version Change Date
1.0 Initial version 11 - 2007

Document Metadata
SB20 - Software CRE_1405 released to support FLFS
Title:
Cassette and “White Label Digitizer” DIS329.07E
Livelink ID: 18799955
Version#: 8
Version Date: 2007/11/07 02:23 PM CET
Status: Approved on 2007/11/09 12:11 PM CET
Owner: Arthur Julius Hermle (exfha)
Created By: Arthur Julius Hermle (exfha)
Created Date: 2007/09/04 06:04 AM CET
This document was approved by:
Signatures:
1. Paul Merckx (amdag) on 2007/11/09 10:23 AM CET

2. Michael Reichart (agrmi) on 2007/11/09 11:22 AM CET
3. Georg Kulik (SIKUL) on 2007/11/08 09:36 AM CET
Version & Status History

Version# Date Created Status
8 2007/11/07 02:23 PM CET Approved - 2007/11/09
7 2007/11/07 02:09 PM CET
6 2007/10/31 03:02 PM CET Reviewed - 2007/11/06
5 2007/10/31 02:52 PM CET
4 2007/10/11 02:49 PM CET
3 2007/09/27 06:48 AM CET Reviewed - 2007/10/09
2 2007/09/04 06:12 AM CET Reviewed - 2007/09/27
1 2007/09/04 06:04 AM CET
Service Bulletin
HEALTHCARE No. 19
Imaging Services

CR 30-X
Type 5175/100
Communication Problems between CR 30-X and

NX Processing Station: Replace FWI Cables
Task
Apply at all sites
HQ issue: #
Apply at affected sites HQ_0708210001
Next service as listed below
Optional to improve
Task Tracking
Purpose of this document:This document describes defect and solution of the symptom "No
communication or sporadic communication only between CR 30-X digitizer and NX processing
station".
Defect: Internal and external FWI cables with insufficient transmission characteristics
Solution: Replace internal (1.3 m) and external (4.5 m) FWI cable
SN 2018 to 2300
09 - 2007 Document Node ID: 18720042

1 Introduction
Symptom No communication or sporadic communication only between CR 30-X digitizer
and NX processing station.
Defect Internal and external FWI (FireWire Interface) cables with insufficient transmission
characteristics due to a change of the cable supplier.
Internal cable: Digitizer SN 2033 to SN 2300
External cable: Digitizer SN 2018 to SN 2300
Following text is printed on the affected, poor quality cables:

AWM 20276 80C 30V VW-1 TONGBAO IEEE1394
Internal FireWire Cable
External FireWire Cable

(Length max. 4.5 m/15 ft)
2 Prerequisites
SPARE PARTS:
Order a spare external and internal FWI cable from stock:
• External 4.5 m FWI cable: 10+9 9999 1255 0
• Internal 1.8 m FWI cable: CM+9 0477 1087 0
The 4.5 m FWI cable can also be organized locally. Use a 6-pin to 6-pin cable of following
brand:
• Unibrain IEEE 1394 FWI cable, 4.5 m (15 ft), Unibrain part # 1601

IMPORTANT:
If you organize the FWI cable locally, only use the Unibrain cable as specified above.
Do not use other manufacturers or different cable lengths.
TOOLS:
3 mm,
with ball-shaped head Cutter 10 cable ties
3 Instructions
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 45 min.
For SN 2018 to 2032:

(1) Replace the external FWI cable
For SN 2033 to 2300:

(1) Replace the internal and external FWI cable
IMPORTANT:
In week 36 the Agfa Service Managers have been pre-informed about this issue via
E-mail. At this time it was not known yet, that the internal FWI cables are affected, too.
If you replaced the external FWI cable in the meantime, it is according to our tests not
required, to exchange the internal cable, too: Internal FWI cables as they are used in SN
2033 to 2300 in combination with a good quality external cable did not show any
communication problems.
Proceeding:
(1) If you experience communication problems with the solution “internal FWI cable of
SN 2033 to 2300 + good quality external cable”, also exchange the internal cable.
(2) If there are no communication problems, exchange the internal FWI cable at
digitizers with SN 2033 to 2300 at the next service intervention.

4 Verification
(1) Wait till the status indicator at the digitizer switches to green
5 Keywords
CR30-X, CR 30-X, CR30, CR 30, FW cable, FWI cable, FireWire, Fire wire,
6 Version history
Version Change Date


Page 1 of 1

Signatures:
1. Hugo Blockx on 2007/09/06 4:17:12 PM GMT+1
2. Andreas Seidl on 2007/09/06 4:33:21 PM GMT+1
3. Georg Kulik on 2007/09/06 3:46:02 PM GMT+1
Approval Completion Date: 2007/09/06 4:35:53 PM GMT+1

Document ID/Node ID: 18720042
Source Version: 7
PDF Version: 8
Applied Categories and Attributes:
file://D:\sData\Adlib\Express\temp\18720042.7info.html 9/6/2007
No. 18
Imaging Services

CR 30-X
Type 5175/100
Sporadic Errors 10754, 10761, or 10767 with SW CRE_1309:

Install SW Patch CRE_1309A
Task
Apply at all sites
HQ issue: #
Optional to improve
Task Tracking
Purpose of this document This document describes defect and solution for sporadic error
codes 10754, 10761 or 10767 that may appear with machines that were upgraded from
CRE_1206X to CRE_1309 in the field.
Defect: Timing signals for scanning not recognized.
Solution: Install software patch CRE_1309A on top of software CRE_1309
SN ≤ 1815 except 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779,
1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
• This Bulletin replaces the earlier Service Bulletin No.17 - DD+DIS271.07E, Sporadic Errors 10754, 10761, or
10767 with SW CRE_1309: Install SW Patch CRE_1309A.
Changes compared to SB 17 are underlined.
08 - 2007 Document Node ID: 18684857

1 Introduction
Symptom After software upgrade to CRE_1309 as part of
• CR 30-X Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0 or
• Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) Upgrade Kit CR 30-X CM+9 5175 9140 0 or
• CRE_1309 freeware package on MEDNET, GSO library
sporadically error codes 10754, 10761 or 10767 may be displayed during boot-up or just
before scanning.
This mainly happens with machines that have been upgraded from software CRE_1206X to
CRE_1309 in the field. With lower possibility it may also appear at machines with software
CRE_1206X.
Machines delivered from production with ≥ CRE_1309* are not affected, as the tests made in
production since introduction of CRE_1309 are able to detect the fault.
*SN ≥ 1816 plus 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790,
1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
Defect The laser power for determination of the timing signals for scanning (Begin of Line; End of
Line, Geometric Calibration) is set to < 50% of the max. laser power. Due to translucence
tolerances of the calibration board sensors, the required timing signal levels are sporadically
too low.
In software CRE_1309 the possibility for this fault is higher, as the fault detection mechanism
is more sensitive.
Solution Install software patch CRE_1309A on top of CRE_1309 at these machines, which have been
or will be upgraded from CRE_1206X to CRE_1309 in the field.
In this software patch the laser power for detection of the timing signals is set to 100%.

2 Prerequisites
SOFTWARE:
Software version CRE_1309 must already be installed on the digitizer.
SPARE PARTS:
Download software patch CRE_1309A from MEDNET:
GSO Library > Computed Radiography > CR Digitizers > CR30-X > Freeware
NOTE:
Software patch CRE_1309A (and software CRE_1309) is also included in
Full Leg / Full Spine (FLFS) Upgrade Kit CR 30-X CM+9 5175 9140 2 (See SB No. 16).
IMPORTANT:
Contrary to the announcement in Service Bulletin No. 17, software CRE_1309A will not be
put in CR 30-X Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0 (See SB No. 12) due to logistical reasons.
Download software CRE_1309A from MEDNET before you visit the customer to install
Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0. A software update to CRE_1309A is mandatory.
TOOLS:
USB stick to copy software from service PC to NX workstation
3 Instructions
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 30 min.
(1) Check currently installed software version: It must show

- PMI Board CRE_1309/0070A
- HDL Board CRE_1309
- SSC Board CRE_1309
(2) Install software patch CRE_1309A as described in the installation instructions which are
enclosed to the ZIP file on MEDNET.

4 Verification
(1) In the CR30-X service client select "General Device Info - SW Versioning"
(3) Check, whether following installed software versions are displayed:
• PMI board: CRE_1309_A/0070B
• HDL board: CRE_1309
• SSC board: CRE_1309
5 Keywords
CR30-X, CR 30-X, CR30, CR 30, CRE_1309, 1309
6 Version history
Version Change Date


Page 1 of 1

Signatures:
1. Hugo Blockx on 2007/09/06 8:13:24 AM GMT+1
2. Andreas Seidl on 2007/09/06 4:33:45 PM GMT+1

Source Version: 4
PDF Version: 5
file://D:\sData\Adlib\Express\temp\18684857.4info.html 9/6/2007
Imaging Services No. 15
Document No.: DD+DIS241.07E
CR 30-X
5175/100
Replacement of Slow Scan Board or IP Handling Board

requires Reset of NX Processing Station
Task
Apply at all sites
PowerHelp complaint HQ issue:
Optional to improve
Task Tracking

• This service bulletin informs about possible symptoms if a Slow Scan Board or IP
Handling Board is replaced, without resetting of the Control PC.

All CR 30-X digitizers can be affected

1 Introduction/Purpose
Symptom 1 After replacement of an IP Handling Board (CM+9 5175 5230 X) it is possible that after
insertion of the cassette, during cassette clamping error 4152 pops up "Cassette fixer
detected unknown format".
Symptom 2 After replacement of a Slow Scan Board (CM+9 5175 2120 X) it is possible that the aspect
ratio of the scanned image is not exactly 1:1 anymore, but e.g. 1:0,99 or 1:1,01.
IMPORTANT:
Both symptoms only appear, if both of following conditions are fulfilled:
• The digitizer at the production site which is used for board testing and the digitizer on
site, where the new boards are built in, deviate a lot in mechanical tolerances
concerning cassette clamping or the slow scan gear box.
• The NX processing station is always switched on
Defect Missing automatic E-Label data synchronization between control PC (= NX processing station)
and digitizer for the IP handling board and slow scan board.
The E-label synchronization is falsely initiated by a reset of the control PC only .
2 Prerequisites
• Service Documentation CR 30-X, DD+DIS150.06E

Agfa Company Confidential 5175/100
3 Instructions
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 5 min.
Short term solution:

(1) After replacement of an IP handling board or slow scan board, before switch-on of the
digitizer, perform a reset of the control PC
(2) When the PC is booted-up, switch on the digitizer
(3) For the IP handling board replacement only: Perform a stall calibration for all motors.
Long term solution:

The integration of automatic E-label synchronization is addressed for the next digitizer
software version > CRE_1309.
4 Verification
(1) Reboot both, the digitizer and NX processing station

(2) Wait till the green light at the digitizer user interface lights up
(4) Select exam type "System Diagnosis - Flatfield"
(5) Select button "ID" at the processing station: Scanning starts
5 Version history
Version Change Date

1 Initial Revision 2007-07-20

Signatures:
1. Paul Merckx on 2007/07/26 2:00:01 PM GMT+1
2. Michael Reichart on 2007/07/27 10:04:14 AM GMT+1
3. Georg Kulik on 2007/07/25 10:43:51 AM GMT+1

Source Version: 7
PDF Version: 8

HEALTHCARE Service information Bulletin
CR 30-X
5175/100
Creating Test Scans with unexposed IPs
Purpose of this document:

This document describes the two possibilities for selection of examination types at the NX
processing station when scanning unexposed image plates (IPs).
1. Exam type "System Diagnosis - Flatfield" (preferred way)
2. Any clinical exam type, e.g. "Lower extremities"
It describes some peculiarities concerning image processing of unexposed IPs as well as the
different "unexposed IP" image results on the NX processing station for software
≤ CRE_1209D and ≥ CRE_1309.

Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa HealthCare NV
This document describes how to create test scans with unexposed IPs:
In which cases is it required to make test scans with unexposed Image Plates (IPs)?
Scanning unexposed IPs …
• is a typical method to verify a successful repair action at the digitizer hardware or
mechanics.
• cannot be used to verify image quality after any repair action or installation. In this case
an exposed flatfield is required.
How to create test scans with unexposed IPs?
Possibility 1 (preferred way):

Possibility 2:
Same proceeding like possibility 1, instead of “System Diagnosis – Flatfield” select however
any clinical examination type (e.g. Lower Extremities).
Why using exam type “System Diagnosis – Flatfield” for scanning unexposed IPs?
• The image data of an unexposed IP are of no real value.

To avoid misinterpretation of the data if the image processing software MUSICA
(multiscale image contrast amplification) is doing the contrast amplification, exam type
“System Diagnosis – Flatfield” has a fixed window preset, which is used by MUSICA for
contrast amplification. This results in a bright image with very low contrast.
• Using a clinical exam type, e.g. "lower Extremities" for scanning of an unexposed IP,
allows MUSICA to do automatic window setting and corresponding contrast
amplification. Dark spots resulting from cosmic radiation or an image plate which has
been erased long time ago will be visible. Since the digitizer with software ≥ CRE_1309
is raising all pixels which are in the intensity of the noise of the image plate (SAL < 134),
these dark spots will even get a higher contrast (as the window for contrast amplification
is less wide).

Step 1: Scanning of unexposed IP Simplified Histrogram of a test scan

with an unexposed image plate
Number pixels
0 134 4096
SAL
Step 2: Raising pixels < SAL 134

Histrogram
Histrogramafter
afterCRE_1309
CRE_1309
has setset
has allall
values < SAL134
values < 70 LPVtoto134
70
2
Number pixels
0 134 4096
SAL
Step 3: Image 1: Predefined window for image processing with 2: Automatic window setting for image processing with
Processing Examination Type “System Diagnosis - Flatfield” clinical Examination Type, e.g. “Lower Extremities”
Resulting image on NX Resulting image on NX
Step 4: Image
displayed on NX
Figure 1
NOTE:
On the next pages some FAQs are listed which came up recently with introduction of
digitizer software CRE_1309:

Question Why does the digitizer with software ≥ CRE_1309 set pixels with SAL values < 134 to 134?
Answer SAL (Scan Average Level) Values < 134 of a clinical image are a clear indication of an
unexposed area (e.g. due to collimation, lead marker etc.). To avoid, that MUSICA is doing
unnecessary image processing in this area, which shows more or less the noise of the
image plate, this noise is “flattened” by setting all pixel values to an equal, low value.
MUSICA will not do any contrast enhancement in this area, as all pixels have SAL
value 134. This behavior is also implemented in the digitizers CR85 and CR75.
Question Does the fact, that pixel with SAL values < 134 are set to 134 have an effect on the
diagnostic information of the image?
Answer This behavior has no effect on the diagnostic information on the image. It just improves
image quality in unexposed areas.
Question Why does the lgM value in the Dose Monitoring Window at the NX processing station
display value 0.31 at an unexposed, erased image plate with software CRE_1309:
Answer As in software CRE_1309 all pixels with SAL values < 134 are raised to 134, the displayed
lgM value for an unexposed IP is also raised:
• In software ≤ CRE_1209D the lgM of an erased, unexposed image plate was
close to "0".
• In software ≥ CRE_1309 it is around "0.31".
See calculation below:
Definitions:
lgM = Median of log-converted pixel values
SAL = Scan Average Level (= 12 bit, root compressed value representing the energy of
read-out pixels at digitizers CR 85, CR 35 and related digitizers)
Correlation lgM SAL*

lgM = 2 x log (SAL ) - 3,9478
Example: lgM value for a typical non-exposed test scan: (SAL = 134)
lgM = 2 x log (134) - 3,95 = 0,31
*The description of this correlation is only valid for "flatfields". It cannot be

used for clinical images or technical phantoms.
The displayed lgm-Value of a diagnostic image will not be affected by the upgrade from
software ≤ CRE_1206D to CRE_1309.

Question Why does an image of an unexposed IP look different between software ≤ CRE_1209D and
≥ CRE_1309 if I am using a clinical examination type at the NX processing station?
Answer • With Software ≤ CRE_1209D: All scanned pixel values are used for image processing.
The image will be a more or less noisy, bright image, depending on the erasure status of
the image plate (IP).
• With software ≥ CRE_1309: All pixel values below a certain threshold (SAL < 134) are
set to SAL value 134. If some scanned pixels are above this threshold, MUSICA, the
image processing software on the NX processing station, enhances these pixels. They
are shown as dark spots on a more or less grey image.
This is a normal behavior of MUSICA.
As better the erasure status of the image plate, as less dark spots will be visible.
Different image results at scanning of unexposed IPs

with selection of a clinical Examination Type, e.g. “Lower Extremities”
Software < CRE_1206D Software > CRE_1309
Figure 2
For more information about software CRE_1309 see …

• CR 30-X Service Bulletin No. 12, DD+DIS148.07E, Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0
available to solve various Problems
• CR 30-X Service Bulletin No. 13, DD+DIS148.07E, Software CRE_1309 available on
MEDNET
• Section 3.8, "Software Releases, Patches", of the Technical Documentation CR 30-X.
2 Version history
Version Change Date

Signatures:
1. Franz Goetz on 2007/06/27 5:02:19 PM GMT+1
2. Georg Kulik on 2007/06/29 10:08:59 AM GMT+1
3. Otto Butz on 2007/06/27 4:54:59 PM GMT+1
Approval Completion Date: 2007/07/02 8:50:17 AM GMT+1

Source Version: 8
PDF Version: 9

HEALTHCARE Service Information Bulletin
Document No.: DD+DIS158.07E CR 30-X
5175/100
Software CRE_1309 available on MEDNET

This document announces the availability of software CRE_1309 on MEDNET.
It is made available separately to the Service Kit CR 30-X CM+9 5175 9130 0
(See CR 30-X Service Bulletin No. 12) to
· support replacements of the PMI board, Slow Scan Board and IP handling board ®
they may require software CRE_1309 (or higher)
· to allow upgrade to CRE_1309 before the digitizer is modified at a later time via
Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0

Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa-Gevaert NV
Software CRE_1309 available
· Software CRE_1309 is part of service kit CM+9 5175 9130 0 (See CR 30-X Service
Bulletin No. 12).
· It is also available via MEDNET
At which CR 30-X Digitizers should CRE_1309 be installed
1. To solve immediately most of the current problems with the digitizer perform the
software upgrade to CRE_1309 before installation of the service kit.
NOTE:
Software CRE_1309 is part of service kit CM+9 5175 9130 0. and a strongly
recommended software upgrade for all digitizers with SN ≤ 1815 except 1668,
1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780,
1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
2. After replacement of a ...

o PMI board (CM+9 5175 9020 X)
o Slow Scan Board (CM+9 5175 2120 X)
o IP Handling Board (CM+9 5175 5230 X)
error 2712 (software mismatch) may pop up, if software CRE_1309 (or higher) is not
yet loaded on the control PC. In this case perform a software upgrade to CRE_1309
(or higher).
Main Improvements of Software CRE_1309 compared to CRE_1206D

· Improved, more reliable IP handling
· Improved stability of image quality to prevent "puzzled images" caused by electrostatic
discharge (additional to the mechanical changes in the digitizer which were introduced
with the mechanical service kit)
· Improved communication synchronization between digitizer and control PC
· Improved user messages

NOTE:
A list of all improvements is available in CR 30-X Service Bulletin No. 12,
DD+DIS148.07E and section 3.8, "Software Releases, Patches", of the Technical
Documentation CR 30-X.
2 Prerequisites
Download CRE_1309 software from MEDNET:
REQUIRED TOOLS:
· USB stick
IMPORTANT:
Software CRE_1309 has only been tested with processing station software
NX 1.0.3203 SU2.
It is mandatory to make a software update to NX 1.0.3203 SU2, too, if not yet done.
For details refer to NX 1.0. Service Bulletin No. 14, DD+DIS411.06E.
3 Instructions
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 30 min.
(1) Perform software upgrade as instructed by the installation instructions CRE_1309

DD+DIS117.07E (PDF document is part of the ZIP File).

4 Verification

5 Version history
Version Change Date


Signatures:
1. Franz Goetz on 2007/05/30 4:26:49 PM GMT+1
3. Otto Butz on 2007/05/31 10:33:29 AM GMT+1
Approval Completion Date: 2007/05/31 10:48:46 AM GMT+1

Source Version: 4
PDF Version: 5

Service Bulletin
HEALTHCARE No. 12
Imaging Services
Document no.: DD+DIS148.07E CR 30-X

5175/100
Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0 available to solve various Problems

Task
Apply at all sites HQ issues:
HQ_0611160002 HQ_0702150006
Apply at affected sites HQ_0612080004 HQ_0703070005
as listed below HQ_0612080005 HQ_0703160001
Next service HQ_0704110001
HQ_0612080006
Optional to improve HQ_0701110005 HQ_0704180003
functionality of product HQ_0702080001 HQ_0704240002
HQ_0702150002 HQ_0704270002
Task Tracking

· This document describes the availability of Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0.
· This service kit combines multiple improvements via mechanical modifications and software
upgrade to CRE_1309.
· As software CRE_1309 may only be used in combination with NX software
NX 1.0.3203 SU2 (which is also part of delivery), a new Application License File (ALF) has to be
organized in advance.
· Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0 replaces IP Feeding Optimization Kit CM+9 5175 9100 0, as it has
the same content plus several additional parts.
Affected serial number(s) / batch
SN £ 1815 except 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780,
1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814.
· This Bulletin replaces the earlier Service Bulletins ...

o No. 04 - DD+DIS413.06E, Sporadic Error Message 3194 or 3099: Reset Control PC
o No. 06 - DD+DIS027.07E, Interfering Noise in the Image: Install Software Patch CRE_1206D
o No. 09 - DD+DIS085.07E, Check Drawer Unit Position before first Switch-on of the Digitizer
o No. 10 - DD+DIS097.07E, IP Feeding Optimization Kit CM+9517591000 available to avoid sporadic IP
Jams and Shift in Images due to electrostatic Discharge in Cassette Unit

Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2007 Agfa-Gevaert NV
List of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION/PURPOSE..............................................................................................3
1.1 Sporadic IP Jams in the area of the transport unit (HQ_0611160002) ............................................................. 4
1.2 Sporadic digitizer hang-up without error message after scanning. (HQ_0612080004) ...................................... 5
1.3 Sporadic error 3194 (CmdBase_ResponseTimeout) during bootup (HQ_0612080005).................................... 6
1.4 Sporadic Error 3099 (PDS_WaitScanStartedTimeout) during operation (HQ_0612080006) ............................. 6
1.5 Interfering noise in the image (HQ_0701110005)............................................................................................ 7
1.6 Stripes in fast scan direction or puzzled images (HQ_0702080001) ................................................................ 8
1.7 Error 6194 due to wrong mounted drawer unit stop (HQ_0702150006) ........................................................... 9
1.8 At some digitizers persistent or sporadic error 4152 occurred (HQ0702150002) ............................................ 10
1.9 IP jams in cassette unit possible due to misaligned drawer unit (HQ_0703070005)........................................ 10
1.10 Connection between Digitizer and NX cannot be established (HQ_0703160001)........................................... 11
1.11 Software cannot be loaded to Slow Scan Board (HQ_0704110001) .............................................................. 11
1.12 Sporadic error 10756 during boot-up (HQ_0704240002)............................................................................... 11
1.13 Site specific data show by default "Katharinen Hospital Stuttgart " (HQ_0704270002) ................................... 12
1.14 Confirm button of error messages is not translated to local language (HQ_0704180003) ............................... 12
2 PREREQUISITES.............................................................................................................13
2.1 Prerequisites Software ................................................................................................................................ 13
2.2 Prerequisites Spare Parts............................................................................................................................ 14
2.3 Prerequisites Tools...................................................................................................................................... 15
2.4 Prerequisites Mounting Material................................................................................................................... 15
3 INSTRUCTIONS...............................................................................................................15
4 VERIFICATION ................................................................................................................17
5 VERSION HISTORY.........................................................................................................17

1 Introduction/purpose
Service kit CM+9 5175 9130 0 combines multiple improvements via ...
· mechanical modifications
· digitizer software upgrade to CRE_1309
· NX software update to NX 1.0.3203 SU2
The improvements are arranged in a kit to raise service efficiency and to interrupt customer
operations for one intervention only.
Following problems are solved with this kit:
Symptom short description Details
see …
Error 6194 due to wrong mounted drawer unit stop 1.7
Via mechanical (HQ_0702150006)
modifications Connection between Digitizer and NX cannot be 1.10
established (HQ_0703160001)
Sporadic error 3194 (CmdBase_ResponseTimeout) 1.3
during bootup (HQ_0612080005)
Sporadic Error 3099 (PDS_WaitScanStartedTimeout) 1.4
during operation (HQ_0612080006)
Interfering noise in the image (HQ_0701110005) 1.5
At some digitizers persistent or sporadic error 4152 1.8
Via digitizer software occurred (HQ0702150002)
upgrade to CRE_1309 Software cannot be loaded to Slow Scan Board 1.11
(HQ_0704110001)
Sporadic error 10756 during boot-up (HQ_0704240002) 1.12
Site specific data show by default “Katharinen Hospital 1.13
Stuttgart “ (HQ_0704270002)
Confirm button of error messages is not translated to 1.14
local language (HQ_0704180003)
Sporadic IP Jams in the area of the transport unit 1.1
(HQ_0611160002)
Via combination of Sporadic digitizer hang-up without error message after 1.2
software upgrade to
scanning. (HQ_0612080004)
CRE_1309 and
mechanical Stripes in fast scan direction or puzzled images 1.6
modification (HQ_0702080001)
IP jams in cassette unit possible due to misaligned 1.9
drawer unit (HQ_0703070005)
Via NX software See NX 1.0, Service Bulletin No. 14, Release of Software Patch NX
update to NX 1.0.3203 1.0.3203 SU2 solves various Software Defects
SU2

NOTE:
· For a list of further improvements as well as open issues refer to section 3.8, Software
Releases, Patches of the CR 30-X Technical Documentation.
1.1 Sporadic IP Jams in the area of the transport unit (HQ_0611160002)
Symptom: IP jam is associated with Error 5647 (OPENER_HOME_POS_MAX_STEP_LIMIT).

The image plate is not feed back into the cassette, but jams in the area of the transport unit.
Smaller formats are more prone to the IP jams than large ones.
Defect:
· If – at image plate transport back to the cassette - the rear edge of a small image plate
leaves the rear transport rollers, it is only guided by the two front rollers. If the image
plate in addition is slightly bent up, it possibly jams at the cassette entry. See Figure 1.
· If drawer unit is not in home position, the cassette and IP removal cycle of the boot-up
cycle may misalign the drawer unit, as the boot-up cycle first drives up the lower
transport rollers before it drives back the drawer unit. A misaligned drawer unit can lead
to IP jams.
Solution: PART 1
Modified left and right side plate of upper transport unit, new segmented roller and guide
plate at erasure unit.
BEFORE Modification
IP Jams possible
Erasure Unit
Digitizer cross-section
Cassette
Tray Image Plate
AFTER Modification
Roller mounted lower New guide plate at
and further to the front erasure unit
Roller slightly smaller

and with higher friction
Figure 1
Part 1 introduced in series production with SN ³ 1568.

PART 2
Modified drawer unit: This drawer unit is mechanically improved to keep its alignment, even
if an IP jam occurs.
PART 3:
Software CRE_1309: With this software the digitizer first drives back the drawer unit to
home position after switch on, to prevent, that the lower transport rollers may mis-align the
drawer unit.
Part 2 and Part 3, both introduced in series production for SN ³ 1816 plus SNs 1668, 1679,
1692, 1721, 1726, 1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793,
1795, 1799, 1800, 1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
PART 4: Extended cassette locker at cassette locking unit, to ensure reliable opening and
locking of the cassette locking mechanism. Introduced in series production with SN ³ 1635,
plus 1595, 1610
NOTE:
Purpose of the new guide plate at the erasure unit (see above – Solution – Part 1):
Prevents IP jams before the erasure unit at transport from cassette to erasure unit.
This is required, as the distance between upper roller and erasure unit is increased (less
guidance of the image plate towards erasure unit)
1.2 Sporadic digitizer hang-up without error message after scanning.

(HQ_0612080004)
Symptom:
Additional symptoms:
· Rattling noise in the area of roller stepper motor M5.
· The IP jams in the IP transport area.
· The image is successfully transferred to the NX.
Defect:
Part 1: Mechanical problem of the roller drive gearing:
Drive gear and roller gear run “tooth on tooth”.
Part 2: No error message is displayed for this kind of IP jam

Solution: PART 1: Modified left and right side plate of upper transport unit, new segmented roller and
guide plate at erasure unit. Removal of not used drive gear on upper and lower roller.
Introduced in series production with SN ³ 1568.
PART 2: Error message introduced in software CRE_1309 for this kind of fault.
Introduced in series production for SN ³ 1816 plus SNs 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726,
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
1.3 Sporadic error 3194 (CmdBase_ResponseTimeout) during bootup

(HQ_0612080005)
Symptom: Establishing communication between digitizer and control PC during start-up fails.
The digitizer does not get into "ready" state: The status LED is red blinking.
Defect: Communication synchronization problem
Solution: Corrected timing for synchronization messages in software CRE_1309.
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
1.4 Sporadic Error 3099 (PDS_WaitScanStartedTimeout) during operation

(HQ_0612080006)
Symptom
· Communication between NX and digitizer is disconnected during operation.
· The scanned image is not transferred to the NX.
Defect:
Unhandled Communication exception
Solution: Short term: Reset of the control PC

Long term: Communication exceptions are properly handled in software CRE_1309.
Introduced in series production for SN ³ 1816 plus SNs 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730,
1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802,
1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814

1.5 Interfering noise in the image (HQ_0701110005)

Symptom: The symptom appears in rare cases after a
reset and usually disappears if the digitizer is
switched off for several hours.
Figure 2: Example image with

interfering noise
Defect: Insufficient initialization of the RAM on the PMI board.
Solution: Intermediate solution: Software patch CRE_1206D: There the RAM was reset a few times
additionally at switch-on.
Final solution: In software CRE_1309 the RAM is properly initialized after reset in any case
by introduction of a new FPGA version (= basic software on the PMI board).
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814

1.6 Stripes in fast scan direction or puzzled images (HQ_0702080001)

Symptom: This image fault is associated with error codes 10760 (TOO_LESS_DATA - To less data
stored in SDRAM --> SDRAM filled with RAMP) or 2595 (SRV_ReadImageData - Exception
at reading image data from device).
Figure 3
Defect: Electrostatic discharge during scan, leading to disturbances of BOL (Begin of Line) and EOL
(End of Line) signal

Solution: Part 1: Two additional grounding cables in the cassette unit.

Introduced in series production for SN ³ 1610
Part 2: Re-mounting of internal FireWire cable.

Part 3: Mounting of grounding cable at calibration board carrier

Introduced in series production with a slightly different solution (by mounting of calibration
board with grounding washer) for SN ³ 1816 plus SNs 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730,
1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802,
1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
Part 4: Different time window to read out BOL / EOL signal, introduced with software
CRE_1309.
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
1.7 Error 6194 due to wrong mounted drawer unit stop (HQ_0702150006)
Symptom: Sporadic error 6194 (NUM_RETRIES_DRAWER_OUT_OF_CASSETTE_EXCEEDED)
Defect: Drawer unit stop mounted the wrong way OK NOT OK
Solution: Modified mounting of drawer unit stop.


1.8 At some digitizers persistent or sporadic error 4152 occurred (HQ0702150002)

Symptom: After insertion of the cassette, during cassette clamping error 4152 pops up "Cassette fixer
detected unknown format".
Defect: Stall detection of cassette fixation too sensitive
Solution: Adapted stall detection values in software CRE_1309.

Introduced in series production for SN ³ 1816 plus SNs 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730,
1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802,
1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
1.9 IP jams in cassette unit possible due to misaligned drawer unit

(HQ_0703070005)
Symptom: Drawer unit distance between cassette unit
entry and drawer unit upper plate > 2 mm Drawer unit (Upper plate)
(up to 4 mm)
> 2 mm
Cassette entry
Defect: If drawer unit is not in home position during boot-up (e.g. after transport of the digitizer or IP
jam) the cassette and IP removal cycle of the boot-up cycle may misalign the drawer unit, as
the boot-up cycle first drives up the lower transport rollers before it drives back the drawer
unit.
A misaligned drawer unit can lead to IP jams.
Solution: Part 1: In software CRE_1309 the IP removal cycle has a changed sequence: The drawer
unit is driven back to home position before the lower transport rollers drive up.
Part 2: In addition the drawer unit is reinforced to prevent misalignment due to any
mechanical disturbance.
Both parts of the solutions are introduced in series production for SN ³ 1816 plus SNs 1668,
1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793,
1795, 1799, 1800, 1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
Page 10 of 17 CR 30-X No. 12

1.10 Connection between Digitizer and NX cannot be established (HQ_0703160001)

Symptom: When switching on the digitizer, the "ding-dong" which indicates FireWire activity is not
audible.
Defect: Defective PMI board due to wrong inserted FireWire Interface Cable: A wrong inserted
FireWire cable results in too high power on a data pin on the PMI board, leading to a
defective FireWire driver.
Solution: Distance holder and strain relief mounted in the rear of the digitizer.
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
1.11 Software cannot be loaded to Slow Scan Board (HQ_0704110001)

Symptom: When trying to perform a software upgrade, the software download to the slow scan
board fails. The software version for the slow scan board is indicated as “unknown”
Defect: Problem in communication protocol between slow scan board and PMI board
Solution: Corrected communication in software CRE_1309

1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
1.12 Sporadic error 10756 during boot-up (HQ_0704240002)

Symptom: In some rare cases error 10756 (Analog Digital Converter adjustment out of spec) was
displayed during boot-up
Defect: New lot of analog / digital converters on PMI board which requires different offset: Some
software parameters were too stringent
Solution: Adapted offset adjustment in software CRE_1309.

1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
No. 12 CR 30-X Page 11 of 17

1.13 Site specific data show by default “Katharinen Hospital Stuttgart “

(HQ_0704270002)
Symptom: Site specific data cannot be adjusted according to the actual installed site
Defect: Hard coded site specific data in source code of software
Solution: Software CRE_1309 has empty fields only by default in the site specific data screen.
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
1.14 Confirm button of error messages is not translated to local language

(HQ_0704180003)
Symptom: Customer messages in the error viewer are translated to local language, confirm button
is in English language however
Defect: Missing translation file
Solution: Software CRE_1309 contains proper translation files.
1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780, 1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800,
1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814
Page 12 of 17 CR 30-X No. 12

2 Prerequisites
2.1 Prerequisites Software
SOFTWARE:
· New Application License File (ALF) is required. This has to be organized before the
customer visit to implement the service kit.
If the NX processing station connected to the digitizer is already upgraded to
NX 1.0.3203 SU2 a new ALF is not required.
· NX 1.0, Service Bulletin No. 14, Release of Software Patch NX 1.0.3203 SU2 solves
various Software Defects
IMPORTANT:
Digitizer software CRE_1309, which is part of the service kit, has only been tested in
combination with NX 1.0.3203 SU2. Software update to NX 1.0.3203 SU2 is therefore
mandatory. CD ROM with NX 1.0.3203 SU2 and installation instructions is part of delivery.
No. 12 CR 30-X Page 13 of 17

2.2 Prerequisites Spare Parts

SPARE PARTS:
· Order Service Kit CM+9 5175 9130 0
1 2 3 4
DD+DIS136.07E DD+DIS137.07E DD+DIS117.07E DD+DIS408.06E
CR 30-X Service Kit: CR 30-X Service Kit: Installation Instructions Installation Instructions for
Overview of required Steps Mechanical Modifications Software CRE_1309 Update to NX 1.0.3203 SU2
Installation Instructions
With references to
documents
2 3 4
Normally not required

during modification:
Small Parts Kit
Erasure unit guide plate
F8.5175.9070.0
Segmented transport roller
20 cable ties Distance washer
for drawer unit
Left side plate

transport unit Right side plate
transport unit
Cassette locker
extension pin
Drawer unit
Drawer adjustment tool
2 spare c-clips
Distance Holder with 2 screws M4 x 8 for

2 flat connectors
FWI cable Strain Relief mounting distance holder
6 grounding washers
2 screws M4 x 8 for
Safety Brackets
ground cables
Pre-scan Rollers
Calibration Board grounding cable
2 ground cables
Page 14 of 17 CR 30-X No. 12

2.3 Prerequisites Tools
TOOLS:
200 Multimeter
2 mm (Ohmmeter) USB Stick
wa
ter
pro
of Waterproof pen
cutter
flashlight
pliers
5,5 mm (magnetic) Small size Medium size
3 mm, 7 mm
2.4 Prerequisites Mounting Material
· 2-component glue or “superglue”
3 Instructions
REQUIRED TIME:
Altogether 5 hours, divided in ……
· Approx. 3 hours for mechanical modifications
· Approx. 30 min. for software upgrade of digitizer to CRE_1309
· Approx. 45 min. for software upgrade of the NX processing station to
NX 1.0.3203 SU2
· Approx. 45 min. for final check and informing the customer about the modifications.
No. 12 CR 30-X Page 15 of 17

(1) Use the table below to determine the required modifications for the specific digitizer
(2) Perform the single modifications as described in the documents enclosed to the
service kit
Following single modifications have to be performed depending on the serial number:
# Modification To be installed in SN
1 Additional extension Pin cassette locker ≤ 1634, except 1595, 1610
2 Additional cassette entry ground cables** ≤ 1609
3 Modified upper transport unit side plates and ≤ 1567
segmented roller**
4 Modified, reinforced drawer unit ≤ 1815*
5 Additional distance washer for drawer unit stop** ≤ 1567
6 Additional Erasure Unit Guide Plate** ≤ 1567
7 Optimized Pre-Scan Roller Safety Brackets ≤ 1632
8 FireWire cable with EMI optimized cable path ≤ 1700
9 Calibration board with grounded board carrier ≤ 1815*
10 Additional Distance holder and FireWire cable ≤ 1815*
strain relief
11 Software Upgrade CRE_1309 ≤ 1815*
12 Software Upgrade NX 1.0.3203 SU2 Site dependant
* except 1668, 1679, 1692, 1721, 1726, 1730, 1731, 1745, 1750, 1753, 1770, 1779, 1780,
1786, 1790, 1793, 1795, 1799, 1800, 1802, 1804, 1809, 1812, 1813, 1814.
NOTE:
If the digitizer which shall be modified has got already modification kit
CM+9 5175 9100 0, modifications marked with ** have already been implemented.
This shortens installation time from altogether approx. 5 hours to approx. 3 hours.
Page 16 of 17 CR 30-X No. 12

4 Verification
(7) Repeat steps (2) to (6) approx. 10-times
(8) Repeat steps (2) to (7) for each cassette format the customer is using.
5 Version history
Version Change Date

No. 12 CR 30-X Page 17 of 17

Signatures:
1. Paul Merckx on 2007/05/31 4:10:51 PM GMT+1
2. Manfred Probst on 2007/05/31 6:23:30 PM GMT+1

Source Version: 5
PDF Version: 6

CR 30-X
5175/100
Defective PMI board due to wrong inserted

FireWire Interface Cable
Task
Importance Category Scope
Required
To be applied at all sites Cure for PowerHelp Complaints:
corrective preventive action or HQ_0703160001
commercial goodwill
Next Service
Selective
To be applied on affected sites Problem affects serial number(s) / batch(es)
corrective preventive action or listed below
commercial goodwill
Optional
Recommended Problem affects all sites
Improves functionality of product
Reporting

This document describes the defect and solution for the symptom:
Defective PMI board due to wrong inserted FireWire Interface cable
Defect: A wrong inserted FireWire cable results in a too high power on a data pin on the
PMI board, leading to a defective FireWire driver.
Solution: • Replace defective PMI board (CM+9 5175 9020 0).
• Instruct all users not to insert the FireWire cable by force but to observe
correct positioning as indicated on the sticker.
• For an overview of all Service Bulletins refer to the Order List in MedNet.
04-2007 service bulletin_europeA4-format_e_template_v03
1 Introduction
Symptom: Defective PMI board due to wrong inserted FireWire Interface Cable
Additional information:
• If the PMI board is defective due to wrong inserted FireWire cable in the rear, the
LED as indicated in Figure 1 is off.
• Additional indication for a defective PMI board: By default a "ding-dong" sound is
audible at the NX processing station if it detects the FireWire interface at switch-on
of the digitizer. If the PMI board is defective this "ding-dong" sound is not present.
Defect: A wrong inserted FireWire cable results in too high power on a data pin on the PMI
board, leading to a defective FireWire driver.

LED (yellow) ON OK
LED (yellow) OFF PMI board defective
Figure 1

2 Prerequisites
SPARE PARTS:
• Order PMI board CM+9 5175 9020 0
REQUIRED TOOLS:

3 mm 2,5 mm
5 mm
3 Solution
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 1 hour.
Solution: (1) Replace defective PMI board (CM+9 5175 9020 0).
(2) Instruct all users not to insert the FireWire cable by force but to observe correct
positioning as indicated on the sticker.
Connector
FireWire
Direction
Sticker indicating
Ma nu facturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V.
Type 5175/100
Se ptestraat 27-2 64 0-Mortsel
S/N 1011
10 0-120/220-2 40V 2.0 /1.0A

Date: 2006-07
50-60Hz
-B ELGIUM
correct position
of FireWire connector
Made in Germany
Peissenberg
Jul y 2006
Figure 2

NOTE:
All digitizers with SN ≥ 1532 have a cable tie
around the FireWire connector making it
more difficult to insert the cable wrong by
force.
In the next weeks a spacer will be
introduced, to prevent that the FireWire
cable can be damaged by shifting the
digitizer too close to the wall.
In addition a strain relief will be introduced,
preventing that the cable can be
disconnected inadvertently.
4 Verification


CR 30-X
5175/100
Short dark Stripes in the Image in fast Scan Direction:

Install Postscan ESD Brush Kit
Task
Required
To be applied at all sites Cure for PowerHelp Complaint:
commercial goodwill
Next Service
Selective
commercial goodwill
Optional
Reporting

Short dark stripes in the image in fast scan direction. Width is one pixel (0.1 mm).
Defect: Electrostatic discharge in the postscan area: Lightnings
Solution: Mount the Postscan ESD Brush Kit

SN ≤ 1047, except 1035, 1039, 1041, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1045, 1046
1 Introduction
Symptom Short dark stripes in the image in fast scan direction. Width is one pixel (0.1 mm).
Fast scan direction
IP run (= slow scan) direction
5175enc003.cdr

SN ≤ 1047, except 1035, 1039, 1041, 1042, 1043, 1044, 1045, 1046
Defect Electrostatic discharge in the postscan area: Lightnings

2 Prerequisites
SPARE PARTS:
• Order the Postscan ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Brush Kit CM+9.5175.9080.0.
SCOPE OF DELIVERY:
Postscan ESD Brush HEALTH CARE Enclosure

F7.5175.9001.0 CR 30-X
Postscan ESD Brush

? Purpose of this document
This document describes the installation of the Postscan ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
Brush Kit CM+9.5175.9080.0.
Safety bracket with

copper spring left/right
01/2007
TOOLS:
3 mm 5,5 mm (magnetic)

3 Solution
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 1 hour
(1) Mount the Postscan ESD Brush Kit according to installation instructions
DD+DIS399.06E attached to the spare part.
4 Verification
(1) Expose a flatfield

CR 30-X
5175/100
Light Collector Mantle gets trapped in

Post Scan Rollers of Scan Unit:
Mount modified Light Collector Mantle
Task
Required
commercial goodwill
Next Service
Selective
commercial goodwill
Optional
Reporting
Revision History
Revision Change Date Author Approver
0 Initial Revision 2007-02-16 Hermle Kulik
1 Republishing due to the following corrections: 2007-02-23 Hermle Kulik
• Added DD+DIS398.06E in the Reporting field on
the frontpage.
• Corrected serial number range: Added SN1036
In MEDNET revision 0 has been replaced by revision 1.

Light collector mantle gets trapped in post scan rollers of scan unit
Defect: Rear part of light collector mantle too long - it can protrude in post scan rollers
Solution: Mount modified light collector mantle CM+9 5175 2432 1
SN ≤ 1024, plus 1026, 1027, 1028, 1029, 1035, 1036
1 Introduction
Symptom Light collector mantle gets trapped in post scan rollers of scan unit

SN ≤ 1024, plus 1026, 1027, 1028, 1029, 1035, 1036
Defect Rear part of light collector mantle too long - it can protrude in post scan rollers
2 Prerequisites
SPARE PARTS:
• Order modified light collector mantle CM+9 5175 2432 1.
In comparison to the previous version this mantle has a shorter rear side.
SCOPE OF DELIVERY:
HEALTH CARE Enclosure

F7.5175.9002.0 CR 30-X
Light Collector Mantle

? Purpose of this document
This document describes the installation of the
modified light collector mantle CM+9.5175.2432.1.
01/2007

TOOLS:
3 mm, 4 mm
5 mm 6 mm,
3 Solution
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 2 hours
(1) Mount modified light collector mantle

(2) Perform a shading calibration
NOTE:
Installation Instructions DD+DIS400.06E (attached to the spare part) describe all required
steps in detail.
4 Verification
(1) Check that mantle does not protrude into post scan rollers
(2) Expose a flatfield

CR 30-X
5175/100
Displayed LgM-Values too high:

Install Software Patch CRE_1206C
Task
Required
commercial goodwill
Next Service
Selective
commercial goodwill
Optional
Reporting

Displayed LgM-Values too high.
Defect: Digitizer transfers wrong image plate sensitivity to NX workstation
Solution: Installation of software patch CRE_1206C

SN ≤ 1169, except 1089, 1125, 1140, 1148, 1153, 1158, 1162, 1163, 1164, 1165, 1166,
1167, 1168
1 Introduction
Symptom Displayed LgM-Values too high.

Additional information:
• The LgM value is a measure for the applied dose of the examination
• lgM stands for "Median of log-converted pixel values".
• The lgM value is displayed in the "Dose Monitoring Window" (if NX Quality
Assurance license is available) and can be superimposed in the image (if
configured).

SN ≤ 1169, except 1089, 1125, 1140, 1148, 1153, 1158, 1162, 1163, 1164, 1165, 1166,
1167, 1168
Defect Digitizer transfers wrong image plate sensitivity to NX workstation
2 Prerequisites
SOFTWARE:
• Download software Patch CRE_1206C from MEDNET:
NOTE:
The software ZIP file on MEDNET has a "readme" included which describes all steps for
software update.
TOOLS:
• USB stick to copy software from service PC to NX workstation

3 Solution
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 30 min.
(1) Install software patch CRE_1206C

(2) Delete the history in the dose monitoring window (to prevent a leap in lgM values
before and after installation of the patch)
4 Verification
(1) In the CR30-X service client select "General Device Info - SW Versioning"
(3) Check, whether following installed software versions are displayed:
• PMI board: 1206C
• HDL board: 1206B
• SSC board: 1203
IMPORTANT:
Software patch CRE_1206C also contains software patch CRE_1206B. This patch was
released shortly before CRE_1206C.
It cures sporadic errors 12315 and 5649 during cassette fixation.
Patch CRE_1206B is installed in SN1053, 1056, 1060, 1067, 1069, 1070, 1072,
1073 and ≥ 1075

CR 30-X
5175/100
Sporadic Digitizer Hang-up without

Error Message after Scanning: Reset Digitizer.
Task
Urgency Classification Subject
Cure for PowerHelp Complaint:
Next Service Required*
HQ_0612080004
Problem affects serial number(s) / batch(es)
As Required Recommended
listed below
Information Only
* Commercial related activities e.g. preventive corrective action or commercial goodwill reason
Reporting

Sporadic digitizer hang-up without error message after scanning.
Defect: Mechanical problem of the roller drive gearing:
Drive gear and roller gear run “tooth on tooth”.
Solution: Short term: Inform the customer to reset (i.e. switch off/on) the digitizer.
Long term: Digitizer software patch (in preparation)
1 Introduction
Symptom Sporadic digitizer hang-up without error message after scanning.

Additional symptoms:
• Rattling noise in the area of roller stepper motor M5.
• The IP stays in the IP transport area.
• The image is successfully transferred to the NX.
Defect Mechanical problem of the roller drive gearing: Drive gear and roller gear run
“tooth on tooth”.
2 Prerequisites
None
3 Solution
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 10 min.
Short term solution:

Inform the customer to reset (i.e. switch off/on) the digitizer. This drives the IP back into
the cassette and re-establishes proper run of drive gear and roller gear.
Long term solution:

Modification of the IP transport roller drive in the cassette unit.
In addition introduction of an error message for this kind of fault with the next
software version (intended to be released in Q I/2007).
IMPORTANT:
Please inform the customer never to reset (i.e. switch off/on) the digitizer as long as the
image is not visible on the NX.

CR30-X
Type 5175/100
CR30-X Software CRE_1206 with Patch CRE_1206A released

Task
Importance Category Subject
Required,
To be applied at all sites
Cure for PowerHelp Complaint: ……….
for corrective preventive action or
Next Service, for commercial goodwill
Selective,
Requires to be applied on affected Problem affects serial number(s) / batch(es)
sites (as specified below ) listed below
Optional,
Recommended Improves functionality of product
(as explained below )

• This Service Bulletin announces the release of customer software CRE1206 with
Patch CRE_1206A
• It lists
- affected serial numbers where the software has to be installed
- the required steps for preparation of the software update
- improvements compared to previous installed software versions

SN1001 to SN1020
• For an overview of all Service Bulletins refer to MedNet.
service bulletin_global_
europeA4-format_e_template_v01.doc
CR30-X Software CRE_1206 with Patch CRE_1206A released
• Software CRE_1206 with patch CRE_1206A is the first released customer

software for the CR30-X digitizer.
• Following digitizers were delivered with a software < CRE_1206A and have to
be updated: SN1001 to SN1020
Main Improvements of SW CRE_1206 with Patch CRE_1206A compared to previous

version CRE_1011:
• CR30-X related user messages and warnings at the NX workstation are displayed
now in the language as specified in the NX user account.
• Solved several items which led to lost communication CR30-X - NX.
For details refer to Technical Documentation chapter 3.8, Software Releases, Patches.
2 Prerequisites
SOFTWARE:
• Download software CRE_1206 with Patch CRE_1206A from MEDNET:
NOTE:
The software ZIP file on MEDNET has a "readme" included which describes all steps for
software update.
TOOLS:
• USB stick to copy software from service PC to NX workstation
Page 2 of 4 CR30-X No. 2

3 Solution
REQUIRED TIME:
Approx. 1 h.
(1) Install software CRE_1206 with Patch 1206A as described in the readme which is
enclosed to the ZIP file
IMPORTANT:
The software update may not be performed from USB stick – it has to be copied to the
NX workstation first.
4 Solution Verification
(1) Scan an unexposed image plate with the digitizer

(2) Check the successful transmission to the NX workstation
No. 2 CR30-X Page 3 of 4

5 Service Management System (SMS) Summary Table
Device CR30-X
Machine Type Number 5175 100
Modification SB2
Description Update CRE_1206A
Estimated Work Time 1 hour
No. of Technicians Required 1
Serial Numbers Affected 1001 – 1020
Kit Number Not applicable
Documentation Ref Number DD+DIS381.06E
Part Numbers Not applicable
Quantity of Parts Not applicable
Completion Required By Next service

HEALTHCARE Service Information Bulletin
CR30-X
Type 5175/100
This Bulletin is for Information only
CR30-X System released for Sales

• This Service Bulletin announces the customer release of the
CR30-X system
• It lists the service related documents, training and tools.
• For an overview of all Service Bulletins refer to MedNet.
11-2006 service information bulletin_
europeA4-format_e_template_v01.doc
CR30-X System released for Sales
The CR30-X system is released for sales

Digitizer NX Workstation
since end of October 2006.
The system consists of Cassette
• Digitizer CR30-X with SW
CRE_1206A
• NX 1.0 Workstation with
SW NX 1.0.3203
• Cassette MD4.0T with
Image Plate MD4.0
517511ae.cdr
Figure 1
CR30-X in a Nutshell
(PMI) Board
Optic Module (PMT)
Erasure Unit

Unit Laser Diode Light
Polygon Motor
Chip Laser
Collector
Beam
Reader
Slow Scan
Unit
IP Run
517511ag.cdr
FireWire
Figure 2: CR30-X cross section
• The CR30-X digitizer is the solution for the price sensitive customer.
• The image quality is equal or better CR 25.0 / CR 75.0.
• It is a "flying spot" digitizer, i.e. scanning is done via polygon mirror which
deflects the beam over one scan line (similar CR 75.0 / CR 25.0)

CR30-X System Documentation
Description of Document Reference Location
Technical Documentation
Service Documentation CR30-X DD+DIS150.06E GSO Library
Technical documentation NX 1.0 DD+DIS408.05E GSO Library
User Documentation
CR30-X Usermanual 2386A* HealthCare Library
CR30-X Plates and Cassettes User 2387A* HealthCare Library
Manual
System User Manual CR30-X 2385A* HealthCare Library
Datasheet CR30-X Digitizer NGKVU** HealthCare Library
NX User Manual 4420A* HealthCare Library
NX Key User Manual 4421A* HealthCare Library
* document number of user manual - no order code.
** ABC Code of datasheet. Can be ordered via sales
Application Manuals (for Clinical Application Specialists)

System Application Manual DD+DIS155.03E GSO Library
Guideline for CR 30-X System Setup and DD+DIS326.06E GSO Library
Training
Service Plan (Informs the service organization about the service strategy of a released new product)
Service Plan CR30-X GSO Library
NOTE:
Service relevant information about image plates and cassettes is incorporated in the
CR30-X technical documentation
No. 1 CR30-X Page 3 of 4

Training
• WBT CR30-X*
• WBT NX1.0*
• Currently (Quarter IV 2006) a 2 days instructor based CR30-X training is offered.
• For more details refer to the service plan and the GTC training schedules.
*WBTs will be released together with ALP (Academy Learning Platform) in Q IV/2006
Tools
The CR30-X digitizer does not require special tools except the tools that are already
introduced for Agfa HealthCare equipment.
For details refer to Technical Documentation, chapter 3.2.

HEALTHCARE Chapter 11
Imaging Services Installation Planning
DIGITIZERS
Type 5175 / 100/110
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS172.06E.

10-2007 printed in Germany eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v04
1 2 3
DD+DIS172.06E Installation Planning
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
on the product.


1 2 3

This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 10-2007 • Added information about digitizer type 5175/110.
Details see sections 1 and 8.1.
• Added laptop version of NX Workstation in system
overview. See section 1.1
• Removed reference to "FireWire to fibre optic
converter", as this is not supported anymore. See
section 5.


1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................7

1.1 System Overview ......................................................................................................................7
1.2 Theory of Operation ..................................................................................................................8
2 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.......................................................................10

2.1 Accessories.............................................................................................................................11
2.2 NX Workstation Licenses........................................................................................................12
3 DIGITIZER DIMENSIONS ......................................................................................................13

3.1 Dimensions of optional Table..................................................................................................14
4 MINIMUM FREE SPACE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .....................................15

5 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................16
6 CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................18
6.1 During Operation.....................................................................................................................18
6.2 During Transport and Storage ................................................................................................18
7 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................19

7.1 Electrical Connections at the Digitizer ....................................................................................21
7.2 Electrical Connections at the optional UPS ............................................................................21
8 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................22
8.1 Type Overview ........................................................................................................................22
8.2 Functional Data .......................................................................................................................22
8.3 Electrical DataDigitizer............................................................................................................22
8.4 Functional Dataoptional UPS..................................................................................................22
8.5 Climatic data ...........................................................................................................................23
8.6 Sound Emission Data .............................................................................................................23
8.7 Boot-up Time and Warm-up Time...........................................................................................23
8.8 Interface Data..........................................................................................................................23
8.9 Service Data............................................................................................................................23
8.10 Functional Data Image Plates.................................................................................................23
8.11 Dimensions and Weight ..........................................................................................................24
8.11.1 Dimensions, packed Machine .................................................................................................24


1 2 3
8.11.2 Dimensions, closed Machine ..................................................................................................24
8.11.3 Dimensions, opened Machine.................................................................................................24
8.11.4 Weight .....................................................................................................................................24
8.11.5 Dimensions Pallet ...................................................................................................................24
9 SAFETY STANDARDS...........................................................................................................25


1 2 3
1 Product Description
This is the Installation Planning Document for the Digitizers type 5175,
subtypes 100 and 110.
Name of the digitizers:

• Subtype 100: CR 30-X
• Subtype 110: neutral (no name)
To keep it simple this document talks about "the digitizer" only.

The digitizer CR 30-X is always included, if not otherwise stated.
The differences between subtypes 100 and 110 are described in section 8.
1.1 System Overview

The digitizer is part of the digitizer system, consisting of .......
• Digitizer
• NX Workstation (Tower or laptop version)
• Cassette with Image Plate (IP)
Optional Components (not displayed)

• Printer (Drystar 5302)
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Cassette Cassette
517511ea.cdr
Figure 1


1 2 3
NOTE:
This document describes the installation planning of the digitizer.
For more information to the other components refer to .....
Component Information Location

NX Workstation MEDNET, GSO Library
Printer MEDNET, GSO Library
UPS Sections 2.1, 7.2 and 8.4
1.2 Theory of Operation

(PMI) Board
Optic Module (PMT)
Erasure Unit

Unit Laser Diode
Polygon Motor
Light
Chip Laser
Collector
Beam
Reader
Slow Scan
Unit
IP Run
517511ag.cdr
FireWire
Figure 2: Digitizer general Structure


1 2 3
Shutter
Lock
Image plate
RF-tag
Tray
517511al.cdr
Figure 3: Cassette with Image Plate "MD40" for digitizers type 5175 / 100/110
Explanation of one scan cycle:
1) The user inserts the cassette with image plate (IP) into the digitizer
2) The chip reader reads the image plate data
3) The user enters the patient data at the the NX workstation and selects the ID
button to send the data to the digitizer
4) The cassette unit opens the cassette and pulls out the tray with IP
5) The transport unit drives the image plate to the slow scan unit
6) Via calibration board the digitizer determines the position of the polygon mirror to
synchronize scanning and digitizing.
7) The laser beam which is generated in the optic module scans the image plate,
while the slow scan unit drives the image plate
8) The blue emitted light is collected by the light collector
9) The PMT converts light to current, which is converted to digital pixels by the PMI
board.
10) The digital image data are sent via FireWire Interface to the NX workstation
11) The image plate is driven back by slow scan unit and transport unit to the erasure
unit: Several LED arrays erase the image plate.
12) The transport unit puts the image plate back into the tray, and pushes the image
plate with tray into the cassette.
13) The cassette unit closes the cassette.
14) The red blinking LED at the front panel changes to green, indicating that the scan
cycle is finished.
15) The user removes the image plate for the next exposure.


1 2 3
2 Scope of Delivery and Accessories
IMPORTANT:
• The digitizer is ordered and delivered with a dedicated NX workstation.
• The NX workstation is available as tower or laptop version. For ABC code,
prerequisites and technical data of the laptop version refer to the
NX 2.0 Service Information Bulletin No. 8 (DD+DIS323.07E) on MedNet GSO
library - Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ NX 2.0 Æ
Service Bulletin
• It is not possible to connect the digitizer to another type of Agfa CR workstation
(e.g. QS 3.5).
NOTE:
The digitizer is delivered with all parts, which are required to connect it to a
NX workstation.
Quantity Description
1 Digitizer
1 CU filter
1 Installation procedure
1 CE declaration of conformity
1 Installation report
1 Installation Instruction (Chapters 1 and 11 of the Technical
Documentation)
1 FireWire cable (IEEE 1394), 4.5 m
1 1 power cable, Europe, 3 m long
1 1 power cable, USA, 3 m long
1 CD with SW for the digitizer
1 CD with User Manuals in 28 languages* and reference manual in
English language
*Chinese-simplified, Chinese-traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Vietnamese,
Estonian, Hungarian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Slovak, Slovenian, Turkish.
NOTE:
Number and format of cassettes / image plates is depending on the individual order.


1 2 3
2.1 Accessories
Item Order Number Comment

Table with wheels EWRP3 For dimensions refer to 3.1
UPS Powerware EGPSE Can be used for digitizer and NX workstation. For
5115, technical specifications see sections 7.2 and 8.4.
120 V Version
See safety note below.
UPS Powerware EGPTG
5115,
220 V Version
Wall fixation Kit EWRQ5 To be used in earthquake areas and in mobile usage.
May not be used in military vessels.
Rear Mounting Plate
Retainers for digitizer feet
Base Plate
517511bb.cdr
CR Inroom X-Ray EQBD5 For protection from scattered radiation for CR

Shielding cassettes inside or outside the digitizer, if installed in
the X-ray room. May not be used to protect operator
personnel.
X-Ray Shielding
517511ak.cdr
Warning:
standby generator.


1 2 3
NOTE to Accessory "Remote Service":

In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the digitizer to a certain extent
remotely.
To enable remote service of the digitizer remote access has first to be organized.
Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System
(SRSS).
For more information to the SRSS see MEDNET – GSO Library - Technical
Services - Service Delivery - SRSS
2.2 NX Workstation Licenses

NX Lite - EL NX Premium - EL
Order Codes Order Codes
NX application in • Workflow Engine CR 30-X ES82S ES83U
4 main panes • DICOM Print
• DICOM Store
Starter Pack
• Export
Mandatory
• Teleradiology
• Basic Tools
• QA Tools
• MUSICA1
• MUSICA1 Uro Tomo
• MUSICA1 Dental
• Multi Patient Export (only NX 2.0)
NX Optiview • Square marker ES897 ES897
• Grid Line suppression
• Black border
NX Integrated • Emergency Not applicable ES9AC
Workflow • MPPS
• Viewing priors
NX Precision • Advanced tools and annotations Not applicable ES9BE
Tools • Advanced measurements
Feature Packs
• Musica1 Advanced processing

Optional
NX Quality • Dose consistency reporting Not applicable ES9DJ

Assurance • Repeat Reject Program
NX RIS RIS Link ES9CG ES9CG
Connectivity
NX Full Leg Full Full Leg/spine stitching (only NX 2.0) E2MX6 E2MX6
Spine
NX Mammo Musica for mammo Not applicable Not applicable
NX Musica2 Musica² for GenRad & Thorax Not applicable ES9GP
Adaptive
NX Pediatric Enhanced Pediatric age groups Not applicable ETL4H
AUTOQC2 AutoQC² SW EVC2V EVC2V
NX Radiotherapy Radiotherapy ES9FN ES9FN


1 2 3
3 Digitizer Dimensions
Scale 1:20. Dimensions in cm [inch].
Digitizer closed:
49.7 [19.6]
517511aa.cdr
78.6 [30.9] 69.3 [27.3]
Figure 4
Digitizer opened:
49.7 [19.6]
517511ab.cdr
100.6 [39.6] 69.3 [27.3]
Figure 5


1 2 3
3.1 Dimensions of optional Table

• For order number of the optional table refer to section 2.1.
• We recommend to use this table for the digitizer, as it perfectly fits to the size and
weight of the digitizer.
• If the customer uses a different table, observe the stability of the table: It must be
able to carry the weight of 98 kg (216.1 lb) and may not be subject to excessive
shock and vibrations from other sources. See also corresponding safety note in
section 5.

73,4 [28,9]
FRONT LEFT
66,5 [26,2]
TOP
65,7 [25,7]
Figure 6


1 2 3
4 Minimum free Space for Operation and Maintenance

> 50 [19.7]
> 10 [3.9] * **
60 [23.6] 60 [23.6]
80 [31.5] 80 [31.5]
60 [23.6] 60 [23.6]
Space required for operation

Space required for installation and repair
537511ac.cdr
Figure 7
NOTE:
If installed on the optional wheel table (see section 2.1) the digitizer can also be
installed in a corner.
Be aware, that the mains switch is in the rear. See section 7.1. At a corner installation
the mains switch may not be accessible.
IMPORTANT:
*The clearance in the rear for electrical connectors and to provide sufficient air flow
has to be at least 10 cm [3.9 in] in any case.
**Also at least 50 cm [19.7 in] space has to be provided on the right hand side to
allow cleaning of the scan line with the claning brush. This can be performed by the
customer.


1 2 3
5 System Integration
• The digitizer has to be connected to a dedicated NX workstation via
Fire Wire cable.
• One NX workstation can acquire images from one digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
• Unpacking and putting on table to be performed by forwarder.
• Recommended table height: 75 cm.
• The Fire Wire cable length is 4.5 m for the NX workstation tower version, and
3 m for the NX workstation laptop version. This cable length is sufficient for the
"Fast ID workflow"*. Using longer cables is not supported.
NOTE:
*Fast ID Workflow means: The cassette is not identified before exposure, but waits
for patient data entry at the NX after the cassette is entered into the digitizer. Only
when the patient data are entered at the NX and sent to the digitizer the scan cycle
begins.
FireWire Cable Length = 4.5 m [15 ft] FireWire Cable Length = 4.5 m [15 ft]
Cassette
75 cm [29.5 in]
recommended PC
517511ai.cdr 6 pin to 4 pin

FWI converter
(part of laptop delivery)
Figure 8
IMPORTANT:
Do not place the laptop on top of the CR 30-X, because the accumulated heat
developed by the digitizer and the laptop may affect the operation of the system.


1 2 3
WARNING:
Using a FWI cable > 4.5 m may lead to unstable or no communication
between digitizer and NX workstation.
Only use the FireWire cable which is part of delivery. Longer cables are not
supported.
WARNING:
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective
earths in different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential
difference can cause a HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
• To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power
Source as the PC
WARNING:
The structure and stability of the used table need to be suitable in relation with the
size and weight of the system. The table may not be subject to excessive shock
and vibrations from other sources.


1 2 3
6 Climatic and ambient Conditions
6.1 During Operation
Ambient temperature: min.: +15°C (59°F)

max.: +30°C (86°F)
best: +20°C (68°F) to 25° C (77°F)
Relative humidity: min.: 15%

(at 25°C (77°F) ambient temperature) max.: 80%
best: 30% to 60%
Radiation influences: If the digitizer is installed in the X-Ray room, it

has to be protected against scatter radiation.
See section 2.1 Accessories
Ambient Light: The digitizer may not be operated in direct sun

light.
No influence on image quality is guaranteed if
operated in ambient light of max. 2500 Lux.
High Frequency Emission and For detailed information refer to the digitizer
Immunity user manual , Appendix B.
6.2 During Transport and Storage
Storage: According IEC 721-3-1 Storage: 1K2, 1M2
Transport According IEC 721-3-2 Transport: 2K2, 2M2


1 2 3
7 Electrical Connections
Warning:
INSTRUCTION:
device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as
isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all
supplies and voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities
department or their engineers.
Installation guidelines Electrical installations have to be done in accordance

with national regulations or statutory requirements,
e.g.:
VDE (Germany) Electrical installations in the
installation room must be in compliance with the
regulations IEC 364, VDE 0100, and
VDE 0107.
UL (US) Electrical installations in the installation
room must be in compliance with the regulations:
“National Electrical Code" (NEC) (NFPA70).
Mains connection in the VDE Double earthed pin outlet in compliance
installation room with DIN 49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II.
UL Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P
plug
Mains cable Euro-Version: H05VV - F3G - 3 x 2.5 mm² with
(part of delivery) earthed pin plug; 2,5 m
US/CAN-Version: SJT, 3 x AGW 18 with NEMA 5-
15P plug; 2,5 m
IMPORTANT:
The digitizer is delivered with two power cables for

US/Europe. Organize a power cable for your country
locally.


1 2 3
Cables for the optional UPS 230 V Version

UPS 1 USB cable; part of UPS delivery
2 Extension cable (1.8 m) ; part of UPS delivery
3 Extension cable (1.8 m) ; part of UPS delivery
4 Mains cable*; part of digitizer delivery
UPS 120 V Version
5 Mains cable*; part of digitizer delivery
6 Mains cable; part of NX delivery
7 USB cable; part of UPS delivery
8 Fixed SJT, 3 x AGW 18 with NEMA 5-15 P plug;
1,8 m
230 V (220 - 240 V) Version

2 Type 5115 - 500i
1
USB 3
517511aj.cdr
4
to wall outlet
120 V (110 - 120 V) Version

Type 5115 - 500
5 6
USB 7
8
to wall outlet
517501al.cdr
Figure 9
* concerning digitizer mains cable delivery see IMPORTANT note
previous page.


1 2 3
Fire Wire cable IEEE 1394,

(part of delivery) - 4,5 m with ferrite core (part of digitizer delivery)
Mains switch Upon digitizer installation, it must be ensured that
either the mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker
for the installation on site is located close to the
machine and easily accessible.
7.1 Electrical Connections at the Digitizer
Mains Switch
517511ad.cdr
100 - 240 V / 50 - 60 Hz AC Intergrounding FireWire

power supply input Connector Connector (IEEE1394)
Figure 10
7.2 Electrical Connections at the optional UPS
230 V (220 - 240 V) Version 120 V (110 - 120 V) Version

Type 5115 - 500i Type 5115 - 500
USB Communication Port USB Communication Port

(to NX Workstation) (to NX Workstation)
Four 10 A, IEC-320 Four 5 - 15

Receptacles Receptacles
10 A, IEC-320 Power cord ( 6ft / 1.8 m)

Input Connector with 5 - 15 Plug
517511aj.cdr
Figure 11


1 2 3
8 Specifications
8.1 Type Overview
Type ABC Code Serial Numbers
5175/100 ETDPS ≥ 1001
5175/110 EXF1O ≥ 6001
8.2 Functional Data
Throughput 35x43 cm cassettes Type 5175/100: min. 70 / hour
Type 5175/110: min. 50 / hour
Pixels per line x scan lines 15 x 30 cm 1440 x 2928
18 x 24 cm 1728 x 2328
24 x 30 cm 2328 x 2928
35 x 43 cm 3480 x 4248
Bits per pixel / number of grey steps 16 / 65535
Scan Resolution [µm] 100
Image Buffer 256 MB (one complete image)
8.3 Electrical DataDigitizer
Rated voltage [~V] 100-240 AC (autosensing)
Frequency [Hz] 50/60
Power consumption [W] 120 standby
320 peak
8.4 Functional Dataoptional UPS
Rated voltage [~V] UPS Powerware 5115 - 500 • 120 = Default
(ABC Code: EGPSE)
• 110 = user adjustable via
rear panel DIP switches
Rated voltage [~V] UPS Powerware 5115 - 500i • 230 = Default
(ABC Code: EGPTG):
• 220 or 240 = user
adjustable via rear panel
DIP switches
Frequency [Hz] 50/60 (autosensing)
Battery runtime [min.] >5
Output Power [W] 500
Dimensions (HxWxD) [mm/in] 192 x 150 x 270 / 7.6 x 5.9 x
10.6
Weight [kg/lb] 7.8 / 17.2
More info refer to www.powerware.com


1 2 3
8.5 Climatic data

Heat emission [kJ/h] 432 standby
1152 maximum
8.6 Sound Emission Data
Noise level acc. in standby: 5 dB(A) maximum
ISO 7779 in operation: 65 dB(A) maximum
8.7 Boot-up Time and Warm-up Time
Boot-up time after switch on or reset [sec.] 60
Warm Up Time "Cold Start" • Image quality within
specification after boot-up
time.
• Optimum image quality after
30 min.
Warm Up Time "Warm Start" (Digitizer was > 30 Warm-up time = boot-up time
min. in operation and not switched off for > 3 min.)
8.8 Interface Data

Interface to workstation IEEE 1394 (FireWire)
8.9 Service Data
Infocounter yes
Error diagnostics built in yes
Remote / preventive service capable yes
8.10 Functional Data Image Plates
Image plate type MD40
Image retention Within 1 hour Recommended readout time
After 2 hours 70% of the stored energy is still
present with no visible loss of
information upon readout
After 24 hours Image retention still exceeds
45%. Slightly reduced image
quality


1 2 3
8.11 Dimensions and Weight

8.11.1 Dimensions, packed Machine
Length / depth (cm / inch) 90 / 35.4
Width (cm / inch) 80 / 31.5
Height (cm / inch) 69 / 27.2
8.11.2 Dimensions, closed Machine
Length / depth (cm / inch) 78.6 / 30.9
Width (cm / inch) 69.3 / 27.3
Height (cm / inch) 49.7 / 19.6
8.11.3 Dimensions, opened Machine
Length / depth (cm / inch) 100.6 / 39.6
Width (cm / inch) 72 / 28
Height (cm / inch) 45 / 18
8.11.4 Weight
Digitizer alone (kg / lb) 98 / 216.1
Digitizer with packing incl. palette 124 / 273.4
(kg / lb)
8.11.5 Dimensions Pallet
Length / depth (cm / inch) 90 / 35.4
Width (cm / inch) 80 / 31.5
Height (cm / inch) 15 / 6


1 2 3
9 Safety Standards
The DIGITIZER complies with:

• The general safety regulations:
o IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 + A2:1995,
o IEC 60601-1-1:2000 / EN 60601-1-1:2001,
o IEC 60601-1-4:1999 / EN 60601-1-4:1996 + A1:1999,
o IEC 60601-1-2: 2001 / EN 60601-1-2:2001,
o UL 60601-1:2003,
o CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1
• The laser safety regulations:

o IEC 60825-1:2001 / EN 60825-1:1994 + A1:2002 + A2:2001,
o DHHS/FDA 21 CFR, Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11;
o EN 540: 1993,
o EN 980: 2003,
o EN 1041: 1998,
o ISO 18906: 2000,
o EN ISO 13485: 2003;
See also section 10 "Compliance" in the appended chapter "Generic Safety Directions"
The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius of
1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment


HEALTHCARE INSTALLATION SITE
READINESS CHECKLIST
Imaging Services
Name of Agfa FSE: ____________________________ Checking date:_____________
Client name: ______________________________________________________
Client address: _________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Contact person,
name and title: _________________________________________________________
Client phone number: ______________________ Extension ____________________
Type of systems: _______________ Order /OGT number:____________________
# Task OK
1 Installation site corresponds to the requirements, with sufficient room for
operation and maintenance.
Details see section 4
2 Digitizer System Integration prepared as recommended.
3 Ambient conditions are within the given limits.
4 Required electrical supply for the system is available.
5 System unpacked and positioned at the installation site
6 AGFATEK Link Service Host installed (if applicable)
INSTALLATION SITE READY FOR INSTALLATION
Remarks:_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Signature of FSE : ___________________


Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany


HEALTHCARE Generic Safety Directions
Imaging Services
Safety Directions
for HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this document

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant
information for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each
Service Documentation as well as Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via

MEDNET => GSO Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.1
1.2 04-2007 • Editorial rework to improve comprehensibility
Document Title
n.a. n.a.
04-2007 printed in Germany Enclosure_e_template_v02
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Read this document prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
Strictly observe all safety directions within this document and on the product.


List of Contents
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER .........................................................................................................6
2 USED ICONS.........................................................................................................7
3 LABELS..................................................................................................................8
3.1 CE Mark ...................................................................................................8

3.2 System Labels..........................................................................................8
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation.............................................9
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS ...................................................................................10
5 REFERENCES.....................................................................................................10
6 INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11
7 INTENDED USER................................................................................................11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11
9 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12
10 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13
11 COMPLIANCE .....................................................................................................14
12 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16
13 RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17
14 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17
15 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ........................17
16 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................23


List of Contents
21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24
23 WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24
24 RECYCLING........................................................................................................ 25
25 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI)................................... 25


Disclaimer
1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.


Used Icons
2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action
Highlights unusual points
Indicates background information
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!


Labels
3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr


Labels
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries. Each laser
source is classified from class 1 to class 4.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye.

Class 2: Laser units having a maximum output of 1 mW. The accessible laser
radiation only lies within the visible range of the spectrum (400 nm to
700 nm). With brief exposure times (up to 0.25 s) there is no danger
due to the blink reflex.
Class 3A: Laser units having a maximum output of 5 mW. The accessible laser
radiation becomes dangerous for the eye, if the cross section of
radiation is reduced by optical instruments. If this is not the case, the
emitted laser radiation in the visible region of the spectrum, with short
exposure times (up to 0.25 s), is not dangerous in the spectral
regions, even for long irradiation times.
Class 3B: Laser units having a maximum output of 500 mW. Dangerous to the
human eye and in particular cases to the skin.
Class 4: Laser units having a higher output than 500 mW. Extremely
dangerous to the human eye and dangerous to the human skin.
Manufacturer AGFA GEVAERT N.V. GIUM

Septestraat 27-2640 -Mortsel-BEL
1011 Date: 20 06-07
Type 5175/100 S/N
50-60Hz
100-12 0/220-240V 2.0/1.0A
Made in Germany
Pe issenberg
July 2 006
Figure 1: Example for Laser Classification


Product Complaints - References
4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident Agfa
HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written correspondence to
the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa
Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 7094
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf


Intended Use - Intended Users - Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
before attempting to work with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make sure
that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the force of
law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.


Connections to other Equipment
9 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other
equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been
performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1
harmonized national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.


Accessories and Spare Parts
10 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com


Compliance
11 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Full quality assurance system ISO

13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.
Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic
safety and essential performance
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
IEC 60601-1-2 It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential in
determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the electromagnetic
environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment of use to permit
the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and provide its
ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.


Compliance
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
• This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org
Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.


Safety Directions for Operation
12 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare service
organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this Technical
Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic t information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, Additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen
which may cause an explosion.
Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
standby generator.


Radiation Protection - Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection -
General Safety Directions for Service Activities
13 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the
jurisdiction in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those
authorized by the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be
made of all radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
• Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
14 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.
15 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 12) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232 ,RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).


General Safety Directions for Service Activities -
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect
or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a PCB
without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering (electrostatic
charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a
grounded conducting metal piece.
16 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
INSTRUCTION:

device when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.


• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:


Safety Directions for Installation Activities
17 Safety Directions for Installation Activities

• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare
trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains ...
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.


Safety Directions for Installation Activities -
Ground potential differences :

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source
as the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical
environments a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in
different localities. If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a
HAZARD for the OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
18 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities

• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.


Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the
manufacturer.
Checking ground connections:

WARNING:
Improper ground connection of the device metal housing may lead to electric
shocks.
• In case of power supply replacements or maintenance check the protective earth

resistance according to the national regulations.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present


Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities -
Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts, Accessories and Devices
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
19 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.
20 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.


Safety Directions concerning Modifications -
Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials - Waste Disposal
21 Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be
implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
22 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
23 Waste Disposal
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which
entered into force as European law on 13th February 2003, resulted in a major
change in the treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life.
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and in
addition, to promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such wastes so as
to reduce the disposal of waste.
The WEEE logo on the product or on its box indicates that this product must not be
disposed of or dumped with household waste. The owner of the equipment is liable to
dispose of all electronic or electrical waste equipment by delivering to the specified
collection point for recycling of such hazardous waste, collection and proper recovery of
electronic and electrical waste equipment at the time of disposal will allow the producer to
help conserve natural resources.
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of human
health and the environment. For more information about electronic and electrical waste
equipment disposal, recovery and collection points, please contact your local, waste
disposal service or producer / distributor of this equipment.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators please

dispose of these separately according to local regulations.


Recycling - Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
24 Recycling
Recycling pass see http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf
25 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.


Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany
printed in Germany
DD+DIS150.06E Glossary and Key Word Index
Chapter 12
List of Contents
1 Glossary ........................................................................................1

eq_12_glossary_e_template_v01

1 Glossary
Term Short description

μGy Micro Gray – x-ray dose
1Gy= 0.87 x 10 –2 J/kg
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center
AE – title Application Entity
ASAP - Package AGFA Scanner Access Package
Software that runs on the processing station. It
handles all digitizer operations
BOL Begin Of Line
BOS Begin Of Scan
Browser A program that provides an interface to the World
Wide Web, e.g. Netscape Navigator, Microsoft
Internet Explorer
Calibration Algorithm to counterbalance irregularities in the
scanner of CR.
CAN bus Control Area Network bus; communication protocol
to interchange data between the connected
participants via only one medium – bus system used
in the digitizer
CAS Clinical Application Specialist
CCM Configuration and Customization Manager: Tool to
edit the configuration file adc.cpf
Collimation Determination of the region of the interesting data in
the image. On that region the image processing is
applied.
CPF – file Customization Parameter File; file that contains
settings for all parameters that can be modified to
configure a CR System according to local needs.
CPU Central Processing Unit. The computing part of a
PC, also known as the “processor” of a PC.
CR Computed Radiography
CU-Filter Copper plate (chemical symbol: CU) used for
exposure of a flatfield.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine
Dose, x-ray dose = kV x mA x sec see also μGy = Micro Gray

Glossary and Key Word Index DD+DIS150.06E

Dosimeter Device to measure x-ray dose
DR Direct Radiography
DRA Direct Remote Access (external product name:
AGFATEC LINK)
Dynamic range Exposure range in which CR can get usable image
data.
Fast Scan Direction Scan direction: This is vertical to the "Slow scan
direction" (= Transport direction of Image Plate
through the scan unit).
FireWire A high-speed serial bus that allows for the
connection of up to 63 devices. Also known as the
IEEE 1394 standard.
FSE Field Service Engineer
GenRad General Radiology
Grid A grid is used to reduce scattered radiation and to
increase sharpness.
GSC Global Support Center
GUI Graphical User Interface
Heel Effect Inhomogeneous exposure: A consequence of the
angle of the target of the tube which results in
greater radiation intensities on the cathode side as
compared to the anode side of the radiation field.
HIS Hospital Information System
Histogram Graphical display of the distribution of gray levels
ID – Chip Chip on the image plate on which the demographic
data as well as plate specific information are stored.
It can be easily replaced in case of defect.
ID Station IDentification Station
Infocounter Software tool that collects information about the
status of the digitizer (installed SW-version, IP
cycles, errors). It is accessible via the CR30-X
Service Client
IP For CR: Image Plate (phosphor plate)
IP Internet Protocol: Internet software that divides data
into packets for transmission over the Internet.
Computers must run IP to communicate across the
Internet. See also TCP.


IP address (Internet Protocol address) The address of a
computer attached to a TCP/IP network.
Jitter A flicker or fluctuation in a display image. To “jitter a
pixel” means to place it off side of its normal
placement by some random amount in order to
achieve a more natural antialiasing effect.
Laser Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of
Radiation
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode; Semi conductor emitting light.
Leeds Phantom Image Plate to check the technical image quality of
the CR. The Leeds Phantom was developed for
Agfa by the University of Leeds.
LUT Look Up Table
mR milli Röntgen, measure for x-ray dose
1 mR corresponds to 8.7 μGy
MCBF Mean Cycles Between Failure
MTTI Mean Time To Install
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
MUSICA Multiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification;
Agfa’s image processing software
Node Nodes in the CAN bus system = printed circuit
board within the CAN bus.
Pixel Smallest addressable point to be scanned on the
film or plate. A maximum of 2048 per line may be
read by the Photomultiplier.
RAM Random Access Memory
Volatile main memory of computers
RIS Radiology Information System
ROI Region Of Interest
ROM Read Only Memory. A memory chip that
permanently stores instructions and data. Its
contents are created at the time of manufacture and
cannot be altered.
RS232 interface Serial interface which converts computer internal
parallel information into serial bits, and vice versa.

Glossary and Key Word Index DD+DIS150.06E

Shading calibration Sensitivity calibration; calibration of each pixel in a
line
Slow-scan direction Transport direction of Image Plate through the scan
unit.
Speed Class (SC) A measure of the exposure necessary to produce a
defined density.
Throughput A value representing the number of image plates, a
digitizer can scan in a certain time frame.
Twain Interface A programming interface that lets a graphics
application activate a scanner, frame grabber or
other image-capturing device.
UI User Interface; part of a computer program that
handles interaction with the user.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply. Backup power used
when the electrical power fails or drops to an
unacceptable voltage level.
URL Uniform Resource Locator. The address that
defines the route to a file on the Web or any other
Internet facility. URLs are typed into the browser to
access Web pages, and URLs are embedded within
the pages themselves to provide the hypertext links
to other pages.
UTP - cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium)
cable. Cable to connect to a computer network.
W/L Window and Leveling of digital images.

CR30-X
Order no.:
DD+DIS150.06E Type 5175/100
1st Edition
HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services
How to print and add Comments
1 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
This PDF manual is screen optimized – nevertheless it is possible to print single pages,
single chapters or the complete manual on paper size DIN A4 or Letter.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3/ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if available.
1.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:
(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter
(2) Write down or remember the shown page number
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages
(4) Select "Print"
(5) Select the page range
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”
NOTE:
“Reduce to printer margins” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“shrink to printable area” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”
2007-05-31 printed in Germany

ReadMeFirst
1.2 Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:
(1) Select "Print"
(2) Select “All”
(3) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(see NOTE previous page)
(4) Select “OK”
2 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
2.1 How to export your Comments

(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List"
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.

Revision 1 How to print and add Comments Page 2 of 3

2007-05-31 Agfa Company Confidential
ReadMeFirst
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”

(4) Save the file with any name
2.2 How to import Comments

(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List"
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.

Revision 1 How to print and add Comments Page 3 of 3

2007-05-31 Agfa Company Confidential

CR30-X - Manual - 2007 - 11 - 12 6.0

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CR30-X - Manual - 2007 - 11 - 12 6.0

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

HEALTHCARE

Imaging Services Service Manual

10-2007 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 19054534

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 2

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 3

Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

3 Repair and Service

3.1 Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

3.2 Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment

4 Reference and Circuit Diagrams

5 Spare Parts List

8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 4

This documentation uses:

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

Not-safety relevant notes

NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

Actions Way of writing Sample

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 5

1 About this Manual

Name of the digitizer:

The digitizer is part of the digitizer system, consisting of .......

Optional Components (not displayed)

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 6

Component Information Location

NX Workstation MEDNET, GSO Library

Printer MEDNET, GSO Library

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 DIGITIZERS Chapter 0 / 7

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Agfa Company Confidential

► Purpose of this document

The latest version is available via

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 3

3.1 CE Mark ...................................................................................................8

6 INTENDED USE ..................................................................................................11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS ..........................11

9 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.........................................................12

10 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................13

12 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION .........................................................16

13 RADIATION PROTECTION .................................................................................17

14 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION .........................17

15 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ........................17

16 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES .............18

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ................................20

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES.........21

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES..........................23

20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 4

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS ................................ 24

22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................. 24

23 WASTE DISPOSAL ............................................................................................. 24